6944 lines
290 KiB
Plaintext
6944 lines
290 KiB
Plaintext
|
||
THE SEMWARE(R) EDITOR JUNIOR
|
||
|
||
(formerly QEdit(R))
|
||
|
||
|
||
Version 4
|
||
|
||
|
||
R E F E R E N C E M A N U A L
|
||
|
||
|
||
Please note that this is the shareware version of the documentation, and
|
||
has been abridged from the original document that accompanies the
|
||
registered version of the software. The licensed commercial version
|
||
includes the complete indexed, bound manual.
|
||
|
||
Copyright 1985-1995 SemWare Corporation.
|
||
All rights reserved worldwide.
|
||
|
||
This software embodies valuable trade secrets proprietary to SemWare
|
||
Corporation.
|
||
|
||
SemWare is a registered trademark of SemWare Corporation. All other
|
||
trademarks and registered trademarks referenced in this document are the
|
||
property of their respective owners. The QEdit registered trademark is
|
||
used under license from Robelle Consulting Ltd.
|
||
|
||
The SemWare(R) Editor Junior (TSE Jr.) software products were formerly
|
||
called QEdit(R) (QEdit Advanced, QEdit TSR, and QEdit for OS/2).
|
||
|
||
Specifications subject to change without notice.
|
||
|
||
The READ.ME file contains information which supplements this
|
||
documentation.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ SALES AND SUPPORT ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ SemWare Corporation ³
|
||
³ Suite C3A ³
|
||
³ 4343 Shallowford Road ³
|
||
³ Marietta, GA 30062-5022 ³
|
||
³ U.S.A. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Orders ONLY: (800) 467-3692 Inside USA, 9am-5pm ET ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Other Voice Calls: (770) 641-9002 9am - 5pm ET ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ InterNet: sales@semware.com ³
|
||
³ or tech.support@semware.com ³
|
||
³ CompuServe: GO SEMWARE (select Section 6) ³
|
||
³ or 75300,2710 ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ FAX: (770) 640-6213 24 hours ³
|
||
³ BBS: (770) 641-8968 24 hours ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
_______
|
||
____|__ | (R)
|
||
--| | |-------------------
|
||
| ____|__ | Association of
|
||
| | |_| Shareware
|
||
|__| o | Professionals
|
||
-----| | |---------------------
|
||
|___|___| MEMBER
|
||
|
||
This program is produced by a member of the Association of Shareware
|
||
Professionals (ASP). ASP wants to make sure that the shareware
|
||
principle works for you. If you are unable to resolve a
|
||
shareware-related problem with an ASP member by contacting the
|
||
member directly, ASP may be able to help. The ASP Ombudsman can help
|
||
you resolve a dispute or problem with an ASP member, but does not
|
||
provide technical support for members' products. Please write to the
|
||
ASP Ombudsman at 545 Grover Road, Muskegon, MI 49442-9427, or send a
|
||
CompuServe message via CompuServe Mail to ASP Ombudsman 70007,3536.
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE SEMWARE EDITOR JUNIOR SHAREWARE SOFTWARE LICENSE
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
This version of The SemWare Editor Junior (the "Software") is NOT public
|
||
domain or free software, but is being distributed as "shareware" for
|
||
EVALUATION PURPOSES ONLY. Your use of this Software indicates your
|
||
agreement to the terms and conditions of this License.
|
||
|
||
COPYRIGHT, PROPRIETARY RIGHTS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The SemWare Editor Junior (TSE Jr.) Software is owned by SemWare
|
||
Corporation or its suppliers and is protected by United States copyright
|
||
laws and international treaty provisions. You may not reverse engineer,
|
||
decompile, disassemble, or create derivative works based on the Software
|
||
for any purpose other than creating an adaptation to the Software as an
|
||
essential step in its utilization for your own use. This Software
|
||
embodies valuable trade secrets proprietary to SemWare; you may not
|
||
disclose any information regarding the internal operations of this
|
||
Software to others.
|
||
|
||
USAGE RESTRICTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
SemWare grants a limited license to individuals to use this shareware
|
||
Software for a 30-day evaluation period on a private, non-commercial
|
||
basis, for the express purpose of determining whether TSE Jr. is suitable
|
||
for their needs. At the end of this 30-day evaluation period, the
|
||
individual must either purchase a license from SemWare for continued use
|
||
of the Software, or discontinue using TSE Jr.
|
||
|
||
What does this mean? If you use this Software on a continued basis, you
|
||
must purchase a license for its use. TSE Jr. is NOT free, and we are not
|
||
giving away free copies. We are giving you the opportunity to try it
|
||
before paying for a license for continued use. It is that simple. Try it
|
||
for 30 days. Then either pay for it, or quit using it.
|
||
|
||
Paying for a license to continue using the Software product is not only
|
||
required, but also allows SemWare to provide support and updates, and
|
||
stay in business. Licensed users receive printed documentation; a
|
||
built-in spelling checker; a macro compiler/decompiler (QMAC);
|
||
additional utilities and configuration files; and a version of the
|
||
program that does NOT show the opening and closing shareware reminder
|
||
screens. Registration of the licensed copy entitles the registered user
|
||
to receive technical support (by phone, fax, our own support BBS, mail,
|
||
or various electronic services such as CompuServe or InterNet), and
|
||
makes them eligible for discounts on future versions.
|
||
|
||
Purchasing a license for The SemWare Editor Junior entitles you to use
|
||
the Software on any and all computers available to you, provided you do
|
||
not operate the Software on more than one computer or terminal at a time
|
||
and you do not operate the Software on a network or a multi-user system.
|
||
If you would like a network or multi-user license, please contact
|
||
SemWare for details.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DISTRIBUTION, COPYING RESTRICTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Individuals are granted a limited license to copy the SHAREWARE version
|
||
of TSE Jr. only for the trial use of other individuals in accordance
|
||
with the limitations identified in this License, and subject to the
|
||
following restrictions:
|
||
|
||
1. You MAY NOT distribute the Software in connection with any other
|
||
product or service.
|
||
|
||
2. You MAY NOT make general use of the Software within a company,
|
||
institution, or agency.
|
||
|
||
3. You MAY NOT copy or distribute the Software for any consideration or
|
||
"disk fee".
|
||
|
||
4. You MAY NOT copy or distribute the Software in modified form. (Any
|
||
distribution must include ALL FILES supplied by SemWare with the
|
||
shareware version of The SemWare Editor Junior, WITHOUT ALTERATION.)
|
||
|
||
5. You MAY NOT distribute the Software documentation, in whole or in
|
||
part, in printed form.
|
||
|
||
Operators of electronic bulletin board systems (Sysops) are permitted
|
||
and encouraged to post the shareware version of TSE Jr. for downloading
|
||
by their users, as long as the above conditions are met. Though a fee
|
||
may be charged for BBS access, NO FEE may be charged to specifically
|
||
access or download the TSE Jr. shareware files.
|
||
|
||
Non-profit computer-related User Groups may distribute the shareware
|
||
version of TSE Jr. provided the above conditions are met. However, such
|
||
User Groups MAY charge a NOMINAL fee to cover the cost of the disk and
|
||
copying of the Software.
|
||
|
||
Disk vendors MUST obtain written permission from SemWare before
|
||
distributing the shareware version of TSE Jr. Certain restrictions
|
||
apply. Generally, ASP approved vendors are granted permission. For
|
||
further details, see VENDOR.DOC.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
SEMWARE PROVIDES THE SHAREWARE VERSION OF THE SEMWARE EDITOR JUNIOR "AS
|
||
IS" AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE
|
||
LAW, SEMWARE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
|
||
NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
|
||
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SPECIFICALLY, SEMWARE MAKES NO REPRESENTATION OR
|
||
WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE IS FIT FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
|
||
|
||
SEMWARE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF
|
||
THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF PROFIT, DATA OR USE
|
||
OF THE SOFTWARE, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
|
||
DAMAGES OR OTHER SIMILAR CLAIMS, EVEN IF SEMWARE HAS BEEN SPECIFICALLY
|
||
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE
|
||
EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE FOREGOING
|
||
LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
|
||
|
||
|
||
U. S. GOVERNMENT LICENSEES
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
If you are acquiring the Software on behalf of any unit or agency of the
|
||
United States Government, the following provisions apply:
|
||
|
||
The Government acknowledges SemWare's representation that the Software
|
||
and its documentation were developed at private expense and no part of
|
||
same is in the public domain.
|
||
|
||
The Government acknowledges SemWare's representation that the Software
|
||
is "Restricted Computer Software" as that term is defined in Clause
|
||
52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations (FARs) and is
|
||
"Commercial Computer Software" as that term is defined in Subpart 27.401
|
||
of the Department of Defense Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement
|
||
(DFARS).
|
||
|
||
The Government agrees that:
|
||
|
||
(i) if the Software is supplied to the Department of Defense (DoD),
|
||
the Software is classified as "Commercial Computer Software" and the
|
||
Government is acquiring only "restricted rights" in the Software and
|
||
its documentation as that term is defined in Clause
|
||
252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) of the DFARS, and
|
||
|
||
(ii) if the Software is supplied to any unit or agency of the United
|
||
States Government other than the DoD, the Government's rights in the
|
||
Software and its documentation will be as defined in Clause
|
||
52.227-19(c)(2) of the FARs.
|
||
|
||
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S.
|
||
Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph
|
||
(c)(1)(ii) of the Rights In Technical Data and Computer Software clause
|
||
at DFARS 252.227-7013. SemWare Corporation, 4343 Shallowford Road,
|
||
Suite C3A, Marietta, Georgia 30062-5022, U.S.A.
|
||
|
||
|
||
EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
You acknowledge and agree that the Software is subject to restrictions
|
||
and controls imposed by the United States Export Administration Act (the
|
||
"Act") and the regulations thereunder. You agree and certify that
|
||
neither the Software nor any adaptation thereof is being or will be
|
||
acquired, shipped, transferred or reexported, directly or indirectly,
|
||
into any country prohibited by the Act and the regulations thereunder,
|
||
nor will it be used for any purpose prohibited by the same.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GOVERNING LAW AND GENERAL PROVISIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This License and Warranty Disclaimer shall be construed, interpreted and
|
||
governed by the laws of the State of Georgia, U.S.A. If any provision is
|
||
found void, invalid or unenforceable, it will not affect the validity of
|
||
the balance of this License and Warranty Disclaimer which shall remain
|
||
valid and enforceable according to its terms. This License and Warranty
|
||
Disclaimer may only be modified in writing signed by you and a
|
||
specifically authorized representative of SemWare. All rights not
|
||
specifically granted in this License are reserved by SemWare.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ORDERING INFORMATION
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
Purchasing a license for TSE Jr. allows you to use the product on a
|
||
regular and/or continuing basis. Registration of your licensed copy of
|
||
TSE Jr. entitles you to technical support from SemWare, discounts on
|
||
updates, and access to the Registered User area of our support BBS
|
||
(770/641-8968, <N81>, 1200/2400/9600 baud, 24 hours a day).
|
||
|
||
With your purchase, you will receive: a licensed copy of TSE Jr. V4.0
|
||
with a 90-day limited warranty; a bound, indexed manual; a built-in
|
||
spelling checker; a macro compiler/decompiler (QMAC); and additional
|
||
utilities for use with TSE Jr.
|
||
|
||
We offer discounts to educational institutions, full-time students, BBS
|
||
sysops, US and Georgia government agencies, and various approved
|
||
Computer-related User Groups. Students must include proof of full-time
|
||
student status (photocopy of current registration slip or student ID
|
||
card). BBS sysops must supply the name and number of their BBS, along
|
||
with any other relevant information. User Groups must be members of our
|
||
SemWare Supporter program. Call for details.
|
||
|
||
All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MULTI-USER LICENSES AND QUANTITY PURCHASES
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
All corporate, business, government, educational, or other commercial,
|
||
public, or private users of TSE Jr. must be licensed. We offer quantity
|
||
discounts as well as multi-user licensing. Please call or write for more
|
||
information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ORDERS OUTSIDE THE U.S.A
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Please use your MasterCard, VISA, American Express, or Discover card
|
||
when ordering, or send a check drawn on a US bank payable in US dollars.
|
||
|
||
|
||
*** The SemWare Editor Junior version 4.0, October 1995 ***
|
||
* SINGLE-USER LICENSE ORDER FORM *
|
||
|
||
|
||
MAIL: SemWare Corporation FAX: (770) 640-6213 24 hours
|
||
4343 Shallowford Rd, Suite C3A BBS: (770) 641-8968 24 hours
|
||
Marietta, GA 30062-5022 USA CIS: 75300,2710
|
||
InterNet: sales@semware.com
|
||
|
||
PHONE (Orders ONLY): (800) 467-3692 OTHER VOICE CALLS: (770) 641-9002
|
||
Inside USA, 9am-5pm ET 9am-5pm ET
|
||
|
||
==========================================================================
|
||
|
||
____ TSE Jr. V4.0 with printed manual ........... @ $59.00 ea $ ______
|
||
|
||
SHIPPING (each copy) .... US/Canada/Mexico: $5; Overseas: $12 $ ______
|
||
|
||
PURCHASE ORDERS under $100.00, add $6 Billing Fee ........... $ ______
|
||
(Does NOT apply to PREPAID Check or Charge Card orders)
|
||
|
||
SUBTOTAL $ ______
|
||
|
||
GEORGIA RESIDENTS please add Sales Tax ................ @ 5% $ ______
|
||
|
||
TOTAL (U.S. Dollars drawn on U.S. Bank, payable to SemWare) $ ______
|
||
|
||
NOTE: Software is provided on 3-1/2" diskette.
|
||
|
||
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
|
||
|
||
Payment by: ( )CHECK ( )VISA ( )MC ( )AMEX ( )DISCOVER
|
||
( )PO#_____________ (copy attached)
|
||
|
||
Name: _____________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
Company (ONLY if company address):_________________________________
|
||
|
||
Address: __________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
: __________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
: __________________________________________________________
|
||
|
||
Voice Phone: _______________________ FAX: ______________________
|
||
|
||
Card #: _________________________________ Exp. Date: ______________
|
||
|
||
Signature of cardholder: __________________________________________
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE SEMWARE EDITOR JUNIOR SOFTWARE IS LICENSED ONLY IN ACCORDANCE WITH
|
||
THE SEMWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT THAT ACCOMPANIES THE SOFTWARE.
|
||
|
||
Prices subject to change without notice. Call to confirm current prices.
|
||
|
||
Contact us about quantity discounts and multi-user licenses, as well as
|
||
discounts for full-time students, BBS sysops, and approved User Groups.
|
||
|
||
TABLE OF CONTENTS
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
INTRODUCTION
|
||
FEATURES
|
||
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
|
||
INSTALLATION
|
||
Tasks to Perform Following Installation
|
||
Setting Up the Editor on a Laptop System
|
||
|
||
1. USER'S GUIDE
|
||
QUICK START
|
||
Getting Started
|
||
In the Editor
|
||
Getting Out
|
||
MENUS
|
||
THE STATUSLINE
|
||
PROMPTS
|
||
USING A MOUSE
|
||
Mouse Equipment
|
||
General Use of the Mouse
|
||
Using the Pull-Down Menus
|
||
Positioning the Cursor and Scrolling Text
|
||
Marking a Block
|
||
Using the Pop-Up Mouse Menu
|
||
Working with Windows
|
||
Summary of Mouse Operations
|
||
FILES
|
||
Creating New Files
|
||
Loading Existing Files
|
||
Locating a File on Disk
|
||
Changing the Current Directory from within the Editor
|
||
Invoking the Editor at a Specific Line Number
|
||
Multiple Files: The Ring
|
||
Saving Files and Exiting
|
||
Read-Only Files
|
||
VIEWING AND GETTING AROUND IN THE TEXT
|
||
Cursor Movement
|
||
Moving Through a File
|
||
Moving Around on the Screen
|
||
Moving By Lines and Characters
|
||
Using Windows
|
||
Creating Windows
|
||
Switching Windows
|
||
Changing Window Size
|
||
Closing Windows
|
||
Synchronized Scrolling in Windows
|
||
FINDING AND REPLACING TEXT
|
||
Finding Text
|
||
Replacing Text
|
||
COPYING, MOVING, CHANGING, AND DELETING TEXT
|
||
Block Commands
|
||
Marking and Unmarking a Block
|
||
CUA-Style Block Marking
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Directly
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Using Scrap Buffers
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Using Scratch Buffers
|
||
Accessing the Microsoft Windows Clipboard
|
||
Examples of Block Commands
|
||
Non-Block Commands
|
||
Adding Text
|
||
Copying Text
|
||
Moving Text
|
||
Deleting And Undeleting Text
|
||
Changing Case
|
||
Sorting
|
||
The Kill Buffer - A Safety Net
|
||
MACROS
|
||
PRINTING
|
||
Print Formatting
|
||
Formfeeds
|
||
THE SHELL AND DOS COMMANDS
|
||
Swapping, [JR] Shell Indicator
|
||
WORD-PROCESSING COMMANDS
|
||
MODES
|
||
|
||
2. CUSTOMIZING THE EDITOR
|
||
INITIATING THE CONFIGURATION PROGRAM
|
||
THE CONFIGURATION MENU
|
||
ADVANCED OPTIONS
|
||
COLORS/SCREEN OPTIONS
|
||
GENERAL OPTIONS
|
||
THE HELP SCREEN
|
||
KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION
|
||
The Keyboard Definition File
|
||
Creating a Keyboard Definition File
|
||
PRINTER OPTIONS
|
||
TAB SETTINGS
|
||
|
||
3. COMMAND REFERENCE
|
||
|
||
|
||
INTRODUCTION
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
The SemWare Editor Junior (TSE Jr.), formerly called QEdit, is a
|
||
full-screen text editor for the IBM PC and compatible computers. TSE Jr.
|
||
is intended for use by those who want a fine-tuned, versatile DOS editor
|
||
that is inexpensive, and operates efficiently in limited resources.
|
||
(For those who want a more powerful editor that includes virtual-memory
|
||
support, a full-featured programming language, and wildcard search and
|
||
replace capabilities, we offer The SemWare Editor Professional.)
|
||
|
||
This manual describes the use and operation of TSE Jr., and includes a
|
||
user's guide, a chapter on customizing the editor, and a reference
|
||
section for editor commands. A separate file, MACRO.DOC, contains
|
||
information about keyboard macros and the editor's macro language.
|
||
|
||
TSE Jr. is a text editor as opposed to a word processor. This means
|
||
that most of its features are geared toward creating and maintaining
|
||
program source code and other text files. However, it can also be used
|
||
like a word processor to write documents or letters since it includes
|
||
many word-processing capabilities.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The editor was developed with these goals in mind:
|
||
|
||
* FAST OPERATION - More than anything else, the editor was designed to
|
||
operate quickly, especially in these areas:
|
||
|
||
- Initially loading a file for editing.
|
||
- Displaying/updating the screen.
|
||
- Moving through the editing window.
|
||
- Searching for text.
|
||
- Saving a file back to disk.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* EASE OF USE - This version includes:
|
||
|
||
- Optional "pull-down" menus.
|
||
- Customizable Help Screen.
|
||
- Complete execution from a single file (Q.EXE).
|
||
- Pop-up file directory and picker.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* COMPACT PROGRAM SIZE - Every effort has been made to keep the program
|
||
size as compact as possible. Even though memory is getting cheaper
|
||
all the time, we do not want the editor to require any more memory
|
||
than absolutely necessary.
|
||
|
||
TSE Jr. is available in three versions: the standard DOS version, the
|
||
memory-resident DOS version (TSE Jr./Mem-Res), and the OS/2 version (TSE
|
||
Jr./2). All three versions offer the same rich set of features and
|
||
behave in much the same manner. This shareware version is based on the
|
||
standard DOS version of TSE Jr.
|
||
|
||
|
||
FEATURES
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
The editor offers a number of powerful features for editing text, both
|
||
easily and quickly. To put that power at your fingertips, the editor:
|
||
|
||
* Is very fast!
|
||
|
||
* Is highly customizable. The editor can be easily configured the way
|
||
you like. You can configure ALL of the special keys on the keyboard
|
||
(Alt, Ctrl, and function keys; <Home>, <PgUp>, etc.), as well as the
|
||
colors, screen appearance, and many other options.
|
||
|
||
* Is easy to use. An optional "pull-down" menu provides ready access
|
||
to the editor's commands, and the Help Screen can be customized for
|
||
your own needs.
|
||
|
||
* Can be used with a mouse. You can optionally perform scrolling,
|
||
window, block, and menu operations using your mouse.
|
||
|
||
* Is compact. Even with all these features, the editor requires less
|
||
than 70K of disk space.
|
||
|
||
* Utilizes all available conventional DOS memory (up to 640K). Edit
|
||
files as large as your computer's memory will allow.
|
||
|
||
* Allows multi-file editing. The number of files you can edit is
|
||
limited only by available conventional memory.
|
||
|
||
* Accommodates editing of files with a line length of up to 2032
|
||
characters.
|
||
|
||
* Enables you to view files through multiple horizontal, resizable
|
||
windows. You can have multiple views of the same file or view a
|
||
different file in each window.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to simultaneously scroll the text in multiple windows
|
||
(with synchronized scrolling).
|
||
|
||
* Offers a utility to locate a file when you do not remember the
|
||
directory in which it exists, or you do not recall the exact name of
|
||
the file.
|
||
|
||
* Provides up to 99 scratch buffers for cut-and-paste or template
|
||
operations. You can even select a buffer from a pick list of your
|
||
current scratch buffers.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to temporarily exit to DOS (or a DOS shell) and use DOS
|
||
commands from within the editor. Optionally, the editor can swap to
|
||
disk or expanded memory to allow even the largest programs (such as
|
||
compilers) to run without exiting the editor.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to copy or paste text directly between the current file
|
||
and the Microsoft Windows Clipboard (or the OS/2 Clipboard, in the
|
||
OS/2 version of the editor).
|
||
|
||
* Supports numerous character, line, and column Block operations. If
|
||
you prefer, you can configure the editor to recognize CUA-style
|
||
Block marking (using the shifted cursor keys).
|
||
|
||
* Saves deleted words, lines, and Blocks in a deletion buffer for
|
||
later recall.
|
||
|
||
* Will load multiple files from the DOS command line, with or without
|
||
wildcard characters.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to specify up to six default file extensions for use when
|
||
loading files and determining tab settings.
|
||
|
||
* Provides line-drawing capability to create diagrams and tables.
|
||
|
||
* Supports enhanced (101-key) keyboards.
|
||
|
||
* Supports EGA 43-line mode, and VGA 28-line and 50-line modes.
|
||
|
||
* Offers a built-in Sort command, with options for ascending,
|
||
descending, and case-insensitive sorting.
|
||
|
||
* Includes many helpful options for finding and replacing text,
|
||
allowing you to: incrementally search for a string; perform a
|
||
"global" find or replace (throughout the entire file); perform a
|
||
"local" find or replace (limited to a marked Block); and anchor a
|
||
find or replace to the beginning or end of a line or Block.
|
||
|
||
* Provides the ability to shift entire Blocks using the tab left and
|
||
right commands (TabLt and TabRt).
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to fill a Block with a specified character (FillBlock
|
||
command).
|
||
|
||
* Offers an optional large, flashing block cursor as a configuration
|
||
option. This is especially helpful for use on laptop computers.
|
||
|
||
* Provides a pop-up ASCII chart that allows you to directly insert the
|
||
selected character into your text.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to display a visual directory tree to change the current
|
||
directory from within the editor.
|
||
|
||
* Includes various tab-handling options, including variable, smart,
|
||
and fixed tabs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
For your word-processing needs, the editor:
|
||
|
||
* Contains a fully-integrated Spell Checker (in the registered version)
|
||
that suggests spellings for misspelled words (less than 200K
|
||
additional disk space required to load dictionary).
|
||
|
||
* Provides wordwrap and paragraph-reformat capabilities.
|
||
|
||
* Includes options to change the case of characters (Flip, Lower,
|
||
Upper commands).
|
||
|
||
* Gives you the ability to center the text on a line (CenterLine
|
||
command).
|
||
|
||
* Includes commands that allow you to swap adjacent characters, words,
|
||
and lines.
|
||
|
||
* Offers various printing options, such as specification of top and
|
||
bottom print margins (SetPrintBotMargin, SetPrintTopMargin
|
||
commands), assignment of the print device, ability to adjust line
|
||
spacing, and inclusion of line numbers.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to configure the date and time formats.
|
||
|
||
* Includes an option to display the hex and decimal values of the
|
||
current character on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
|
||
To further enhance the editor's operation, the macro facility:
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to create macros that will execute a series of commands
|
||
and keystrokes by pressing a single key.
|
||
|
||
* Offers a simple macro scripting language.
|
||
|
||
* Includes the ability to load and/or execute macros from the DOS
|
||
command line, as well as an option to execute an automatic startup
|
||
macro.
|
||
|
||
* Supports conditional logic (Jump, JTrue, JFalse commands).
|
||
|
||
|
||
To assist you in your programming tasks, the editor:
|
||
|
||
* Provides "C mode", which utilizes automatic indentation for
|
||
C-language programming.
|
||
|
||
* Locates matching braces and parentheses, which is very useful for
|
||
entering and maintaining source code.
|
||
|
||
* Allows you to execute command-line compilers from within the editor,
|
||
using the macro facility.
|
||
|
||
* Offers a DOS command-line option (-n) for jumping to a specific line
|
||
number within a file upon loading.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
The editor requires an IBM PC or 100% compatible computer. MINIMUM
|
||
requirements are:
|
||
|
||
* 128 KB of memory for the standard DOS version.
|
||
|
||
* PC-DOS or MS-DOS, v2.0 or greater, for the DOS versions.
|
||
|
||
* One diskette drive.
|
||
|
||
* Either a color or a monochrome monitor with 80-column display.
|
||
|
||
* Less than 70 KB of disk space (or less than 250 KB if the
|
||
spell-checker dictionary is installed, in the registered version).
|
||
|
||
* The editor program itself: Q.EXE. Once configured, no other files
|
||
are necessary for operating the editor. (Note: Additional files are
|
||
required to use the spell checker that is included in the registered
|
||
version.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
INSTALLATION
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
Tasks to Perform Following Installation
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
If you placed the editor in a directory that is not already listed in
|
||
your path, you may want to modify the PATH statement in your
|
||
AUTOEXEC.BAT to include the editor directory. This allows you to run
|
||
the editor from any directory on your machine.
|
||
|
||
Please review the contents of the READ.ME file included with the
|
||
software. This file contains important information (usage information,
|
||
new features, changes, etc.) that became available after this manual was
|
||
created.
|
||
|
||
The READ.ME file also contains a complete list of the files included
|
||
with the software. A partial list is included here:
|
||
|
||
TSE Jr. File Description
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Q.EXE The SemWare Editor Junior program. Once configured, this
|
||
is the only file needed to run the basic editor.
|
||
|
||
Note: Configuration of the editor requires additional
|
||
files.
|
||
|
||
QCONFIG.EXE The configuration program. This program allows you to
|
||
customize the editor.
|
||
|
||
QCONFIG.DAT The default Keyboard Definition file. Used by QCONFIG.EXE.
|
||
|
||
QHELP.TXT The default Help text. Used by QCONFIG.EXE.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Note: After you have tried TSE Jr., you may wish to permanently
|
||
customize some of the options. The editor comes with a
|
||
configuration program, QCONFIG, that makes customizing the editor
|
||
easy. See Chapter 2, "Customizing the Editor," for instructions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Setting Up the Editor on a Laptop System
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
If you have a laptop computer (one with an LCD or plasma display), you
|
||
should set your screen parameters before using the editor. For the best
|
||
operation, enter MODE BW80 at the DOS command line before running the
|
||
editor.
|
||
|
||
Alternatively, you can install the editor for a black-and-white screen
|
||
with the customization program, QCONFIG. Refer to Chapter 2,
|
||
"Customizing the Editor." With this customization program, you should
|
||
choose "1" (Monochrome) from the "Colors/screen" options, when prompted
|
||
with "Startup attribute set:".
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ Please note that one of the MAJOR features of the editor ³
|
||
³ is configurability. You can customize the colors, the ³
|
||
³ keys, the on-screen appearance of the editor, and many ³
|
||
³ other functions. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ By spending just a small amount of time reviewing Chapter ³
|
||
³ 2 on configuration, you can benefit greatly through ³
|
||
³ customizing the editor to your personal preferences. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER 1. USER'S GUIDE
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
QUICK START
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
In the editor, you can edit any text file with a few simple commands.
|
||
The next three sections briefly describe the quickest way possible to
|
||
load, edit, and save a file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Getting Started
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Using the editor is simple and straightforward.
|
||
|
||
To initiate the editor, type "Q <Enter>". The editor will respond with
|
||
a prompt for the name of the file to be edited.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ File(s) to edit: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the filename. The filename may include the full path designation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ At any "File(s) to edit:" prompt, you may use wildcard ³
|
||
³ characters (* or ?) to obtain a list of matching files in ³
|
||
³ the directory. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
You may optionally include the filename on the DOS command line in order
|
||
to bypass this prompt. For example, from the DOS command line, type:
|
||
|
||
q <filename to edit> <Enter>
|
||
|
||
|
||
In the Editor
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Once you are in the editor, the cursor movement keys (Left, Right, Up,
|
||
Down, Home, End, ...) allow you to move around in the text.
|
||
|
||
To obtain a Help Screen, simply press <F1>. Pressing <F1> again (or any
|
||
other key) returns you to the text.
|
||
|
||
To obtain a menu of editing commands, press <Esc>. You may then use the
|
||
cursor movement keys to position the cursor bar over the desired
|
||
command. Press <Enter> to execute the command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ Within a prompt for a command, press <Esc> to cancel the ³
|
||
³ command (and the prompt). ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Getting Out
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The easiest way to get out of the editor and save all the work you have
|
||
done is to enter <Alt F> <G>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MENUS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides an easy-to-use "pull-down" style menu system. The
|
||
menu system is very helpful while learning to use the editor. It is
|
||
also handy for executing seldom-used commands.
|
||
|
||
To access the menus and execute a command:
|
||
|
||
1. Press <Esc>. The main menu is displayed at the top of the screen.
|
||
The main menu consists of a list of sub-menu items.
|
||
|
||
2. Select a sub-menu item. To do this, either move the cursor bar to
|
||
the desired item and press <Enter>; or type the highlighted
|
||
character, or "quick-key," of the desired item.
|
||
|
||
3. Execute a command. This is done in the same manner as selecting the
|
||
sub-menu items.
|
||
|
||
Here is an example of the pull-down style menu system. The User is
|
||
about to execute the CopyBlock command.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³File Window ±Block± Search Print Macro Editing Other Quit ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
³ Mark Line ³
|
||
³ Mark Character ³
|
||
³ Mark Column ³
|
||
³ Mark Begin ³
|
||
³ Mark End ³
|
||
³ UnMark ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³±Copy Block±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ Move Block ³
|
||
³ Delete Block ³
|
||
³ Copy Over ³
|
||
³ Fill... ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ Sort ³
|
||
³ Ignore Case [Off] ³
|
||
³ Descending [Off] ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
As an added convenience, the default configuration of the editor allows
|
||
you to directly access the File, Print, and Quit sub-menus by pressing
|
||
<Alt F>, <Alt P>, or <Alt Q>, respectively.
|
||
|
||
You can execute many editing commands using the menus. As you become
|
||
more familiar with the editor, you may wish to use the <Ctrl>, <Alt>,
|
||
and function key assignments, instead of the menus, to execute commands
|
||
more quickly.
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE STATUSLINE
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
At the top of the editing screen is the StatusLine. The StatusLine
|
||
constantly displays information about the file you are currently
|
||
editing.
|
||
|
||
The StatusLine is shown below with a description of the information
|
||
displayed.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³L 15 C 15 IAWRBS 411K *c:\semware\status.doc 20h,32³
|
||
ÀÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÂÂÂÂÂÂÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÙ
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄ The hex and decimal
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ value for the character
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ at the cursor position,
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³ if this option is ON.
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄ The path and name of the
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³ file you are editing
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³ ÀÄÄÄ *) Indicates file has been changed
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄ Amount of available memory
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³ (DOS versions only)
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³ÀÄÄÄ S) Indicates Synchronized Scrolling mode is ON
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³ÀÄÄÄ B) Indicates Box Drawing mode is ON
|
||
³ ³ ³³³³
|
||
³ ³ ³³³ÀÄÄÄ R) Indicates Macro Recording is ON
|
||
³ ³ ³³³
|
||
³ ³ ³³ÀÄÄÄ W) Indicates WordWrap mode is ON
|
||
³ ³ ³³
|
||
³ ³ ³ÀÄÄÄ A) Indicates AutoIndent mode is ON
|
||
³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄ I) Indicates Insert mode is ON
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄÄ The current cursor column number
|
||
³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄ The current cursor line number
|
||
|
||
|
||
For more information on Insert, AutoIndent, WordWrap, and Box Drawing,
|
||
refer to the "Modes" section in this chapter. For more information on
|
||
macro recording, see the file MACRO.DOC.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ The StatusLine may be configured to appear at the bottom ³
|
||
³ of the screen. Refer to the "Colors/Screen Options" ³
|
||
³ section of Chapter 2 for more information. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
PROMPTS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
When the editor needs information from the user (such as the name of a
|
||
file to edit, a search string, etc.), a prompt is issued. The prompt
|
||
consists of a message, telling what information is requested, and an
|
||
area for the user to enter a response. The following commands are
|
||
available in prompts (if assigned to a key):
|
||
|
||
|
||
AsciiChart CursorLeft DirTree Paste
|
||
BackSpace CursorRight EndLine Pause
|
||
BegLine DelCh Escape Return
|
||
CopyBlock DelLine Literal ToggleInsert
|
||
CurrentFilename DelToEol LocateFile
|
||
|
||
|
||
Other commands are simply ignored.
|
||
|
||
Note: Execute DelLine (<Ctrl Y> or <Alt D>) to clear the response area
|
||
of any prompt.
|
||
|
||
|
||
USING A MOUSE
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
You can optionally use the mouse to perform a wide range of functions
|
||
within the editor, including selecting items from a menu or a pick list,
|
||
positioning the cursor on the screen, scrolling text, marking and
|
||
manipulating Blocks, and creating and moving between windows.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Mouse Equipment
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
To use a mouse in the editor, the mouse must be enabled. This is done
|
||
by setting the configuration option "Enable mouse processing" to <Y>.
|
||
(This is the default setting for this option. Refer to the "Advanced
|
||
Options" section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
To fully use the mouse capabilities, the editor must also be configured
|
||
to display a full border around each window on the screen. This is
|
||
because the mouse uses the border area to scroll text and perform many
|
||
window operations. To display a border around each window, set the
|
||
configuration option "Do you want the display boxed" to <Y>. (Refer to
|
||
the "Colors/Screen Options" section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
When the editor detects that a mouse is present and enabled, the
|
||
following special mouse-sensitive areas are included in the window
|
||
borders. (These areas, called mouse "hot spots", are used by the mouse
|
||
to perform particular operations, described later in this section.)
|
||
|
||
* A horizontal scrollbar is placed in each bottom window border, and a
|
||
vertical scrollbar is placed in each right-hand border.
|
||
|
||
* The symbol is located at the left of each horizontal scrollbar, and
|
||
the symbol is located at the right.
|
||
|
||
* The symbol is located at the top of each vertical scrollbar, and the
|
||
symbol is located at the bottom.
|
||
|
||
* Within each horizontal scrollbar, an elevator shaft runs between the
|
||
and symbols, and includes an Û elevator symbol. This horizontal
|
||
elevator moves within the elevator shaft according to your relative
|
||
column position in the current file.
|
||
|
||
* Within each vertical scrollbar, another elevator shaft runs between
|
||
the and symbols, and includes an Û elevator symbol. This vertical
|
||
elevator moves within the elevator shaft according to your relative
|
||
line position in the current file.
|
||
|
||
* The [] or [] symbol is located on the right-hand side of the
|
||
StatusLine of each window when multiple windows are open. When the
|
||
windows are non-zoomed, the [] symbol is displayed in each window.
|
||
When a window is zoomed, the [] symbol is displayed in the zoomed
|
||
window.
|
||
|
||
* The [þ] symbol is located on the left-hand side of the StatusLine of
|
||
each window when multiple windows are open.
|
||
|
||
|
||
If desired, you can configure the editor for left-handed use of the
|
||
mouse (rather than right-handed). To do this, set the configuration
|
||
option "Left-handed mouse" to <Y>. (Refer to the "Advanced Options"
|
||
section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
Additional configuration options have an effect on the behavior of the
|
||
mouse in the editor. Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter
|
||
2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
General Use of the Mouse
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
To initiate an action with the mouse, position the mouse pointer at the
|
||
appropriate place on the screen, and then press one of the buttons on
|
||
the mouse (either the <LeftBtn> or <RightBtn>), as indicated by the
|
||
mouse command assignments described later in this section. Depending on
|
||
the desired action, you either "click," "press and hold," or "drag" the
|
||
mouse, as follows:
|
||
|
||
* To click a mouse button, press and immediately release the button.
|
||
|
||
For certain commands, you execute the command one time only by
|
||
clicking the mouse button. For some commands, you must click the
|
||
indicated mouse button two or three times, as instructed for that
|
||
command. For multiple clicks, the mouse pointer must remain at the
|
||
same location while the button is repeatedly clicked the specified
|
||
number of times.
|
||
|
||
* To press and hold a mouse button, press and hold the button for a
|
||
period of time before releasing it. The amount of time that the
|
||
button must be held is determined by the configuration option
|
||
"Mouse hold time". (Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
For commands that are invoked by clicking a mouse button, a command
|
||
can be executed multiple times by pressing and holding the button. The
|
||
command is executed repeatedly until the mouse button is released. The
|
||
value assigned to the configuration option "Mouse repeat-delay factor"
|
||
determines the number of times that a command is repeated while the
|
||
button is held. (Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter
|
||
2.)
|
||
|
||
* To drag the mouse, press the indicated mouse button, and continue to
|
||
hold down the button as you drag the mouse pointer to another location
|
||
on the screen. Do not release the button until the mouse pointer is
|
||
positioned at the desired location.
|
||
|
||
The action caused by the mouse is determined by the location of the
|
||
mouse pointer when a mouse button is pressed:
|
||
|
||
* On the StatusLine, clicking the <LeftBtn> displays the main pull-down
|
||
menu.
|
||
|
||
* Within menus, prompts, and pick lists, clicking the <LeftBtn> is the
|
||
same as pressing <Enter>, and clicking the <RightBtn> is the same a
|
||
pressing <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
For entries in menus and pick lists, the position of the mouse pointer
|
||
determines the entry that is selected when you click the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* Within the text portion of a window, various operations with the
|
||
<LeftBtn> are used to position the editing cursor or to mark a Block.
|
||
(A few of the Block-marking commands are executed by pressing the
|
||
<LeftBtn> in combination with the <Ctrl> or <Alt> keys on the
|
||
keyboard.)
|
||
|
||
* Anywhere in a window while in editing mode (when no menus, prompts, or
|
||
pick lists are active), clicking the <RightBtn> pops up a special
|
||
Mouse Menu of Block-related commands.
|
||
|
||
* In a window border, the <LeftBtn> is used to scroll the text, or to
|
||
create, resize, or switch windows. The special mouse symbols and
|
||
scrollbars ("hot spots") in the window borders are used to execute
|
||
specific scrolling or window commands.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using the Pull-Down Menus
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
To execute a command or set an option from the pull-down menus using the
|
||
mouse, you can follow these steps:
|
||
|
||
* Display the main pull-down menu by placing the mouse pointer on the
|
||
StatusLine and clicking the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* Select a sub-menu item from the menu by placing the mouse pointer on
|
||
the item and clicking the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* Select a command or option from a sub-menu by placing the mouse
|
||
pointer on the desired item and clicking the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
To exit from the pull-down menus, click the <RightBtn> until the main
|
||
menu is removed from the screen, or move the mouse pointer outside the
|
||
menu area and click the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Positioning the Cursor and Scrolling Text
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
You can use the mouse to position the cursor or scroll text on the
|
||
screen, as described by the following. Note that the special symbols,
|
||
, and the horizontal and vertical elevators along the scrollbars
|
||
are used for scrolling.
|
||
|
||
* To position the editing cursor:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer in the text of the current window where you
|
||
want the cursor to be positioned, and click the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll down in the file, by line:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the symbol. To scroll down one line,
|
||
click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the
|
||
<LeftBtn>; scrolling continues until the button is released, or the
|
||
end of the file is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll up in the file, by line:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the symbol. To scroll up one line, click
|
||
the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the <LeftBtn>;
|
||
scrolling continues until the button is released, or the beginning of
|
||
the file is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll left in the text, by column:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the symbol. To scroll left one column,
|
||
click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the
|
||
<LeftBtn>; scrolling continues until the button is released, or column
|
||
1 is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll right in the text, by column:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the symbol. To scroll right one column,
|
||
click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the
|
||
<LeftBtn>; scrolling continues until the button is released, or the
|
||
maximum line length is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll down in the file, by page:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the scrollbar below the vertical elevator
|
||
(Û), within the vertical elevator shaft. To scroll down one page,
|
||
click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the
|
||
<LeftBtn>, keeping the mouse pointer below the elevator; scrolling
|
||
continues until the button is released, or the elevator joins the
|
||
mouse pointer, or the end of the file is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll up in the file, by page:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the scrollbar above the vertical elevator
|
||
(Û), within the vertical elevator shaft. To scroll up one page, click
|
||
the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and hold the <LeftBtn>,
|
||
keeping the mouse pointer above the elevator; scrolling continues
|
||
until the button is released, or the elevator joins the mouse pointer,
|
||
or the beginning of the file is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll left in the text, by TabWidth:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the scrollbar to the left of the horizontal
|
||
elevator (Û), within the horizontal elevator shaft. To scroll left by
|
||
one TabWidth, click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat scrolling, press and
|
||
hold the <LeftBtn>, keeping the mouse pointer to the left of the
|
||
elevator; scrolling continues until the button is released, or the
|
||
elevator joins the mouse pointer, or column 1 is reached.
|
||
|
||
* To scroll right in the text, by TabWidth:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the scrollbar to the right of the
|
||
horizontal elevator (Û), within the horizontal elevator shaft. To
|
||
scroll right by one TabWidth, click the <LeftBtn>. To repeat
|
||
scrolling, press and hold the <LeftBtn>, keeping the mouse pointer to
|
||
the right of the elevator; scrolling continues until the button is
|
||
released, or the elevator joins the mouse pointer, or the maximum line
|
||
length is reached.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Marking a Block
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The following describes how to use the mouse to mark a Block of text.
|
||
|
||
* To mark a single line:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the line to be marked. Click the <LeftBtn>
|
||
three times (without moving the mouse pointer).
|
||
|
||
* To mark multiple lines:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the beginning line to be marked. Press and
|
||
hold <Alt> (on the keyboard) and the <LeftBtn>. Then drag the mouse
|
||
to the desired ending line, and release <Alt> and the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To mark a stream of characters:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the beginning character to be marked.
|
||
Press and hold the <LeftBtn>. Then drag the mouse to the desired
|
||
ending character, and release the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To mark a column:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the beginning character to be marked.
|
||
Press and hold <Ctrl> (on the keyboard) and the <LeftBtn>. Then drag
|
||
the mouse to the desired ending position, and release <Ctrl> and the
|
||
<LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To mark a word:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on a character in the word to be marked.
|
||
Click the <LeftBtn> twice (without moving the mouse pointer).
|
||
|
||
|
||
When the ending position for a Block is not displayed on the screen, you
|
||
can scroll the text in the necessary direction by dragging the mouse
|
||
pointer outside the current window on the appropriate side. Then drag
|
||
the mouse pointer back inside the current window to stop scrolling and
|
||
continue marking.
|
||
|
||
Note: To drag the mouse pointer outside a window, there must be a
|
||
border, other editing window, or StatusLine onto which to move
|
||
the mouse pointer; otherwise, the file cannot be scrolled in that
|
||
direction.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ To unmark a Block using the mouse, place the mouse pointer ³
|
||
³ on a blank character on the screen and click the <LeftBtn> ³
|
||
³ twice. The editor attempts to mark a word at that ³
|
||
³ location. Because the blank character is not a word, the ³
|
||
³ editor fails to mark a Block, though it succeeds in first ³
|
||
³ unmarking the existing Block. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using the Pop-Up Mouse Menu
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
A special Mouse Menu allows you to use the mouse to easily display a
|
||
menu of Block-related commands. To pop-up the Mouse Menu with the mouse
|
||
while in editing mode, click the <RightBtn> (with no menus, prompts, or
|
||
pick lists active). You can then select one of the displayed
|
||
Block-related commands by placing the mouse pointer on the desired item
|
||
and clicking the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
To remove the Mouse Menu, click the <RightBtn> until the Mouse Menu is
|
||
removed from the screen, or move the mouse pointer off the Mouse Menu
|
||
and click the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Working with Windows
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section describes how to use the mouse to create, switch, resize,
|
||
and close windows.
|
||
|
||
* To open a horizontal window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the left border of the window to be split
|
||
and click the <LeftBtn> twice.
|
||
|
||
* To switch to another window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer in the desired window, and click the
|
||
<LeftBtn>. To switch to another window and also position the editing
|
||
cursor at the mouse position in that window, press and momentarily
|
||
hold the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To resize a window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the StatusLine of the window to be resized.
|
||
(Note that you cannot resize a window using a StatusLine located at
|
||
the very top or very bottom of the screen.) Press and hold the
|
||
<LeftBtn>, so that a resizing bar appears. Then drag the resizing bar
|
||
to the desired location and release the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
* To zoom a window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the [] symbol in the StatusLine of the
|
||
window to be zoomed, and click the <LeftBtn>. While the window is
|
||
zoomed, the [] symbol is replaced by the [] symbol.
|
||
|
||
* To "unzoom" a window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the [] symbol and click the <LeftBtn).
|
||
The previous windows are restored to the screen, along with the []
|
||
symbol.
|
||
|
||
* To close a window:
|
||
|
||
Place the mouse pointer on the [þ] symbol in the StatusLine of the
|
||
window to be closed, and click the <LeftBtn>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Summary of Mouse Operations
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Mouse Pointer
|
||
Block Marking Mouse Button Location
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Word Click <LeftBtn> 2 times Word in any window
|
||
|
||
Single line Click <LeftBtn> 3 times Text in any window
|
||
|
||
Multiple lines Drag <Alt LeftBtn> Text in any window
|
||
|
||
Column Drag <Ctrl LeftBtn> Text in any window
|
||
|
||
Characters Drag <LeftBtn> Text in any window
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Cursor Movement
|
||
and Scrolling Mouse Button Mouse Pointer Location
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Position cursor Click <LeftBtn> Text in current window
|
||
|
||
Scroll down:
|
||
1 line Click <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
multi lines Hold <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
1 page Click <LeftBtn> Scrollbar below vertical Û
|
||
multi pages Hold <LeftBtn> Scrollbar below vertical Û
|
||
|
||
Scroll up:
|
||
1 line Click <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
multi lines Hold <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
1 page Click <LeftBtn> Scrollbar above vertical Û
|
||
multi pages Hold <LeftBtn> Scrollbar above vertical Û
|
||
|
||
Scroll left:
|
||
1 column Click <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
multi columns Hold <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
1 TabWidth Click <LeftBtn> Scrollbar left of horiz. Û
|
||
multi TabWidths Hold <LeftBtn> Scrollbar left of horiz. Û
|
||
|
||
Scroll right:
|
||
1 column Click <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
multi columns Hold <LeftBtn> symbol
|
||
1 TabWidth Click <LeftBtn> Scrollbar right of horiz. Û
|
||
multi TabWidths Hold <LeftBtn> Scrollbar right of horiz. Û
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Menus, Prompts Mouse Pointer
|
||
and Pick Lists Mouse Button Location
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Pull down Main Menu Click <LeftBtn> StatusLine
|
||
|
||
Pop up Mouse Menu Click <RightBtn> Anywhere on screen
|
||
|
||
Select from Menu Click <LeftBtn> Menu / Pick List item
|
||
or Pick List
|
||
|
||
Accept StatusLine Click <LeftBtn> Anywhere in Prompt
|
||
or Prompt entry
|
||
|
||
Exit Menu Click <RightBtn> Anywhere on screen
|
||
OR
|
||
Click <LeftBtn> Outside Menu area
|
||
|
||
|
||
Cancel/remove any Click <RightBtn> Anywhere on screen
|
||
Prompt or Pick List OR
|
||
Click <LeftBtn> Outside Prompt or
|
||
Pick List
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Mouse Pointer
|
||
Windows Mouse Button Location
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Open Click <LeftBtn> 2 times Left window border
|
||
|
||
Switch window Click <LeftBtn> New window
|
||
|
||
Switch window and Hold <LeftBtn> Text of new window
|
||
position cursor
|
||
|
||
Resize Drag <LeftBtn> Window StatusLine
|
||
|
||
Zoom Click <LeftBtn> [] symbol
|
||
|
||
Unzoom Click <LeftBtn> [] symbol
|
||
|
||
Close Click <LeftBtn> [þ] symbol
|
||
|
||
|
||
FILES
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Creating New Files
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
There are three different ways to create new files, ready for editing.
|
||
|
||
1. From the DOS command line, enter <Q> followed by one or more new
|
||
filenames. Each filename must be separated by a space. For example,
|
||
typing:
|
||
|
||
q file1 b:file2 \dir1\file3 <Enter>
|
||
|
||
will create "file1" in the current directory, "file2" on disk drive
|
||
B, and "file3" in the directory "dir1".
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ When specifying filenames, you may use full path ³
|
||
³ designations if desired. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
2. From the DOS command line, type "Q <Enter>". The editor responds
|
||
with the prompt:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ File(s) to edit: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter one or more new filenames, each separated by a space.
|
||
|
||
3. From within the editor, execute the EditFile <Alt E> command. The
|
||
above prompt will appear. Again, you may enter one or more new
|
||
filenames, each separated by a space.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Loading Existing Files
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Loading existing files works exactly like creating new files (in the
|
||
previous section) with two exceptions:
|
||
|
||
* The filename(s) specified must exist on disk.
|
||
|
||
* The filename(s) may contain wildcard characters (*, ?).
|
||
|
||
You can configure the editor to respond to wildcarded filename entries
|
||
in one of two ways:
|
||
|
||
1. To load all matching files into the editor.
|
||
|
||
2. To show all the matching filenames in a "pick" listing. You can then
|
||
use the cursor keys to find the file you want and press <Enter> to
|
||
load it into the editor.
|
||
|
||
You can also configure the editor to use default file extensions, such
|
||
as "doc" and "pas" when entering filenames. For more information on
|
||
configuring these options, refer to the "General Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
|
||
In the default configuration of the editor, a handy macro for loading a
|
||
file has been assigned to <Ctrl ]>. This macro will take the filename
|
||
at the current cursor position in the text, and load that file into the
|
||
editor. For example, if you have the following text in a program source
|
||
file:
|
||
|
||
#include "d:\tsejr\src\local.h"
|
||
|
||
you could position the cursor anywhere within the specified path and
|
||
filename, and press <Ctrl ]>. The editor would then load that file and
|
||
make it the current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Locating a File on Disk
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The LocateFile command in the editor allows you to easily locate a file
|
||
when you do not remember the directory in which that file resides, or
|
||
you do not recall the exact name of the file.
|
||
|
||
* LocateFile <Esc><F><A>
|
||
This command searches an entire drive for a specified filename. A
|
||
list of all matching filenames is displayed, allowing you to select an
|
||
appropriate file to edit.
|
||
|
||
When you execute this command, it prompts you for the filename for
|
||
which to search. A complete name or an ambiguous name (with DOS
|
||
wildcard characters) can be specified. By default, the current drive
|
||
is searched. However, a different drive can be searched by prefacing
|
||
the filename with the drive name (such as, d:foo). The default or
|
||
specified drive is then searched, and all matching filenames are
|
||
displayed in a pick list. To select the desired file to edit,
|
||
position the cursor bar on that filename in the pick list, and press
|
||
<Enter>. To remove the pick list (and terminate the command), press
|
||
<Esc>.
|
||
|
||
If you assign LocateFile to a key, you can execute this command within
|
||
any "File(s) to edit:" prompt (such as displayed by the EditFile <Alt E>
|
||
command).
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing the Current Directory from within the Editor
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor's DirTree command provides a very helpful visual means for
|
||
changing your current directory from within the editor.
|
||
|
||
* DirTree <Esc><F><I>
|
||
This command displays a pick list of all the drives on your system,
|
||
along with a directory tree for the current drive. The current drive
|
||
or directory can be changed from this pick list.
|
||
|
||
Assuming your current drive is the D: drive, and you also have A:, B:,
|
||
C:, and E: drives available on your system, following is an example of
|
||
what the directory tree pick list might look like when you execute
|
||
this command:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Dir Tree ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ A: ³
|
||
³ B: ³
|
||
³ C: ³
|
||
³ D: ³
|
||
³ ÃÄÄÄTSEJR ³
|
||
³ ³ ÃÄÄÄMAC ³
|
||
³±±±³±±±ÃÄÄÄDOC±±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄSPELL ³
|
||
³ ³ ÃÄÄÄTEMP ³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄWORD ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄTSEPRO ³
|
||
³ ÃÄÄÄDOC ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄMAC ³
|
||
³ E: ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
To switch to a different directory, move the cursor bar to the desired
|
||
entry in the tree, and press <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
To change to a different drive, move the cursor bar to the desired
|
||
drive, and press <Enter>. The selected drive becomes the current
|
||
drive, and the directory tree for that drive is displayed in the pick
|
||
list.
|
||
|
||
To remove the directory tree pick list, press <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Invoking the Editor at a Specific Line Number
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
A DOS command-line option (-n) allows you to specify a line number in a
|
||
file on which to position the cursor when the file is loaded into the
|
||
editor. From the DOS prompt type:
|
||
|
||
q <filename to edit> -n<specific line number>
|
||
|
||
For example, to load file1 at line number 125, from the DOS command line
|
||
you would enter:
|
||
|
||
q file1 -n125
|
||
|
||
Or, if you prefer:
|
||
|
||
q -n125 file1
|
||
|
||
|
||
Multiple Files: The Ring
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor allows as many files as will fit into memory to be loaded at
|
||
the same time. All of these files can then be edited by simply
|
||
switching back and forth between them without having to save and load
|
||
each file individually. Switching between files is accomplished very
|
||
quickly and easily.
|
||
|
||
A simple explanation of how the editor handles multiple files will help
|
||
you in manipulating and editing multiple files.
|
||
|
||
All files that are loaded into the editor are maintained in a "ring".
|
||
As we describe each of the commands used to manipulate the files in the
|
||
ring, refer to the illustration below.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³±±±±³ ³
|
||
³ ÚÄÄÄÄÄ> ³ A ³ <ÄÄÄ<Ctrl K P>³±B±±³<Alt N> ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³±±±±³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ³ ³
|
||
³ v ^ <Alt E> v ³
|
||
³ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ ³ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ F ³ <ÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄ> ³ C ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ³ ³ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ³
|
||
³ ^ v v ^ ³
|
||
³ ³ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ÚÄÄÄÄ¿ ³ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄÄÄ> ³ E ³ <ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ > ³ D ³ <ÄÄÄÄÙ ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ÀÄÄÄÄÙ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ The "Ring" ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
In the ring we see that six files have been loaded into the editor. You
|
||
can, of course, load many more files - as many as your computer's memory
|
||
will allow.
|
||
|
||
Assume the file currently being edited is file "B". You may then move
|
||
from one file to another in any of the following ways:
|
||
|
||
* Enter the NextFile <Alt N> command. You will now be editing the next
|
||
file in the ring, file "C".
|
||
|
||
* Enter the PrevFile <Ctrl K P> command. You will now be editing the
|
||
previous file in the ring, file "A".
|
||
|
||
* Enter the EditFile <Alt E> command. The editor will prompt for a
|
||
filename. You may enter the name of any file in the ring. The editor
|
||
will make the entered file the current one for editing.
|
||
|
||
* Enter the ListFiles <Esc><F><T> command. You will be shown a
|
||
scrollable list of all loaded files, from which you may select a
|
||
different file to edit.
|
||
|
||
|
||
You may, at any time, add files to the ring or discard files from the
|
||
ring. If you add a new file to the ring using the EditFile command, it
|
||
will become the current file and the old current file will become the
|
||
previous file. If you delete a file from the ring the previous file
|
||
will become the current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ When loading files, be aware that the editor will not load ³
|
||
³ two copies of the same file. If you issue the EditFile ³
|
||
³ command for a file already loaded, that file will become ³
|
||
³ the new current file. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Saving Files and Exiting
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides several different ways to save files, discard files,
|
||
and exit the editor. A set of five basic commands provides assorted
|
||
combinations of saving, discarding, and exiting in order to suit
|
||
individual preferences.
|
||
|
||
We recommend selecting one or two methods with which you feel most
|
||
comfortable and using them consistently.
|
||
|
||
The table below summarizes these commands and their effects.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Command for Single ³ Command for Multiple ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³File or Current File ³ Files ³ 1 ³ 2 ³ 3 ³ 4 ³ 5 ³
|
||
³ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³Exit <Ctrl K D> ³ GExit <Alt X> ³ ³ X ³ ³ X ³ X(a) ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³File <Ctrl K X> ³ GFile <Alt F><G> ³ X ³ ³ ³ X ³ X(a) ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³PQuit <Ctrl K Q> ³ GPQuit <Alt Q><Q> ³ ³ ³ X ³ X ³ X(a) ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³Quit (b) ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ X ³ X ³
|
||
³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
³SaveFile <Ctrl K S> ³ GSave <Alt Y> ³ X ³ ³ ³ ³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
1. Edited file(s) are saved unconditionally
|
||
|
||
2. User prompted to save edited files (Y/N)
|
||
|
||
3. User warned that file changes may be lost
|
||
|
||
4. File(s) are discarded from editor
|
||
|
||
5. The editor is terminated
|
||
|
||
(a) The Exit, File, and PQuit commands can be configured to terminate
|
||
or not terminate the editor. Refer to the "General Options"
|
||
section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
(b) USE WITH CAUTION!
|
||
|
||
|
||
Read-Only Files
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Read-Only files can be loaded and edited. However, they cannot be
|
||
saved.
|
||
|
||
When a Read-Only file is initially loaded, the message "File is
|
||
READONLY" is displayed at the top of the screen. If you subsequently
|
||
attempt to save a Read-Only file, the following message appears:
|
||
|
||
ÉÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ»
|
||
ºCannot save READONLY files - Press <Esc> º
|
||
ÈÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍͼ
|
||
|
||
To save a Read-Only file, simply save it under a different name using
|
||
the WriteBlock <Alt W> command (be sure there are no marked Blocks in
|
||
the file), or change the filename using the ChangeFilename <Alt O>
|
||
command and then save the file under the new name.
|
||
|
||
|
||
VIEWING AND GETTING AROUND IN THE TEXT
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor is quite versatile in allowing you to move around in the
|
||
text. With simple keystrokes you can either move a few characters or
|
||
lines at a time or move from one end of the file to another. You can go
|
||
to specific lines in the file or go to each occurrence of a particular
|
||
string of characters. And with the editor's windows, you can view
|
||
multiple files at a time or have multiple views of the same file.
|
||
|
||
As you will see, there are quite a few commands available for moving
|
||
around in your text. If you are not already familiar with these types
|
||
of commands, try them out. You will probably find some new commands
|
||
that will be useful when editing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Cursor Movement
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Moving Through a File
|
||
|
||
The editor provides a number of commands to allow you to move about in a
|
||
file.
|
||
|
||
* BegFile <Ctrl PgUp>, EndFile <Ctrl PgDn>
|
||
As their names imply, these commands move the cursor to the beginning
|
||
or end of the current file. BegFile positions the cursor at column
|
||
one on the first line of the file. EndFile positions the cursor after
|
||
the last non-blank character on the last line of the file.
|
||
|
||
If you are in the process of marking a Block using the MarkColumn
|
||
command, the cursor column position does not change when you execute
|
||
BegFile or EndFile. (This is true only while you have marked the
|
||
beginning of a Block using MarkColumn, but have not marked the end of
|
||
the Block.)
|
||
|
||
* PageUp <PgUp>, PageDown <PgDn>
|
||
PageUp scrolls the text toward the top of the file, one page-full,
|
||
less one line, at a time. PageDown scrolls the text toward the end of
|
||
the file, one page-full, less one line, at a time.
|
||
|
||
* HalfPgUp and HalfPgDn
|
||
These commands work exactly like the PageUp and PageDown commands,
|
||
except that they scroll only one-half page at a time.
|
||
|
||
* NextPara, PrevPara, EndPara
|
||
These commands move the cursor to the start of the next, previous, or
|
||
to the end of the current paragraph.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ All editor commands, including those without default key ³
|
||
³ assignments, can be assigned as the user desires, to ³
|
||
³ almost any key. Refer to the "Keyboard Configuration" ³
|
||
³ section of Chapter 2 for more information. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* ScrollUp <Ctrl W>, LineUp
|
||
These commands scroll the text one line at a time toward the beginning
|
||
of the file.
|
||
|
||
The ScrollUp command causes the cursor to remain on the same line of
|
||
text until it reaches the bottom of the screen, while the LineUp
|
||
command causes the cursor to remain stationary on the screen.
|
||
|
||
* ScrollDown <Ctrl Z>, LineDown
|
||
These commands scroll the text one line at a time toward the end of
|
||
the file.
|
||
|
||
The ScrollDown command causes the cursor to remain on the same line of
|
||
text until it reaches the top of the screen, while the LineDown
|
||
command causes the cursor to remain stationary on the screen.
|
||
|
||
* GotoLine <Ctrl J>
|
||
Upon entering the GotoLine command, the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Go to line: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Type a line number and press <Enter>. The cursor then "jumps" to the
|
||
specified line number. An easy way to move about quickly in your text
|
||
is to keep track of critical positions by noting their line number,
|
||
which is displayed on the StatusLine, and then using this command to
|
||
"jump" to those positions.
|
||
|
||
* GotoBlockBeg <Ctrl Q B>, GotoBlockEnd <Ctrl Q K>
|
||
These commands move the cursor to the beginning or to the end of the
|
||
currently marked Block. If the marked Block is in another file, the
|
||
editor makes that file the current file and then moves you to the
|
||
beginning or end of the Block. For more information on using marked
|
||
Blocks, refer to the "Block Commands" section in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
* PrevPosition <Ctrl Q P>
|
||
This command can be very handy. It moves you to the cursor's previous
|
||
position. Although it is not of much use if you have only moved a
|
||
character or two, it can be useful for larger jumps of the cursor.
|
||
|
||
For example, perhaps you are in the middle of a file and want to check
|
||
something at the very beginning of the file. To go to the beginning,
|
||
you would simply enter BegFile <Ctrl PageUp>. After you look at the
|
||
beginning, you want to go back to where you were previously. You
|
||
could use PageDown, but that could be tedious, especially if your file
|
||
is large. The easiest way would be to enter PrevPosition, and with a
|
||
single keystroke, you are immediately back where you started.
|
||
|
||
PrevPosition can only take you back to the cursor's immediately
|
||
previous position. If there are intervening keystrokes that move the
|
||
cursor, PrevPosition will move you back to the most recent location of
|
||
the cursor.
|
||
|
||
* NextEqualIndent, PrevEqualIndent
|
||
These commands move the cursor to the next or previous line (as
|
||
appropriate) whose text starts in the same column as the current line.
|
||
If the current line is blank, the cursor moves to the next or previous
|
||
blank line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Moving Around on the Screen
|
||
|
||
These commands affect the cursor position within the current screen of
|
||
displayed text.
|
||
|
||
* BegScreen <Ctrl Home>, EndScreen <Ctrl End>
|
||
These commands move you to the first or last line of the screen (or
|
||
current window if you have windows open). The cursor's column
|
||
position does not change.
|
||
|
||
* BegLine <Home>, EndLine <End>
|
||
You are probably already familiar with these commands. BegLine moves
|
||
the cursor to the beginning, or column one, of the current cursor
|
||
line. EndLine moves the cursor to the last non-blank character of the
|
||
current cursor line.
|
||
|
||
* FirstNonWhite
|
||
This command is intended as a replacement for the BegLine command. It
|
||
positions the cursor on the first non-white (space) character on the
|
||
current line, or column 1 if the line is blank. An interesting
|
||
variation is a command that toggles between the beginning of the line
|
||
and the first non-white character on that line:
|
||
|
||
home FirstNonWhite MacroQuitTrue BegLine
|
||
|
||
Refer to the "Keyboard Configuration" section of Chapter 2 for more
|
||
information on changing command assignments in the editor.
|
||
|
||
* ScreenLeft <Alt F5>, ScreenRight <Alt F6>
|
||
These commands scroll the entire text to the left or right one column
|
||
at a time. You can change the number of columns which are shifted
|
||
each time using the configuration program. Refer to the
|
||
"Colors/Screen Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
* WordLeft <Ctrl Cursor Left>, WordRight <Ctrl Cursor Right>
|
||
These commands move the cursor to the first character of the previous
|
||
or following word in the text.
|
||
|
||
* MakeCtrofScreen <Shift F5>, MakeTopofScreen <F5>, and MakeBotofScreen
|
||
These three commands change the position of the cursor line on the
|
||
screen (or window, if you have windows open). They can be useful if
|
||
you prefer to work at the bottom or top of the screen or if you want
|
||
to keep the text surrounding your cursor line in view.
|
||
|
||
The MakeCtrofScreen command scrolls the text on the screen (either up
|
||
or down) until the cursor line is the center line of the screen.
|
||
|
||
The MakeTopofScreen command scrolls the text upward until the cursor
|
||
line is the top line of the screen.
|
||
|
||
The MakeBotofScreen command scrolls the text downward until the cursor
|
||
line is the last line of the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Moving By Lines and Characters
|
||
|
||
These commands enable you to move in short increments through the text.
|
||
|
||
* CursorLeft <Cursor Left>, CursorRight <Cursor Right>
|
||
These commands move the cursor one column to the right or left on the
|
||
cursor line.
|
||
|
||
When you use CursorLeft, the cursor stops when it reaches the left
|
||
edge of the screen, unless the text has been scrolled to the left. In
|
||
that case it scrolls the text to the right one column at a time until
|
||
it reaches column one.
|
||
|
||
When you use CursorRight and the cursor reaches the right edge of the
|
||
screen, it begins to scroll the text to the left. It stops scrolling
|
||
when it reaches the maximum line length.
|
||
|
||
If you prefer that cursor left/right would wrap at the beginning and
|
||
end of lines, you can assign the following macros in your QCONFIG.DAT
|
||
file in lieu of cursor left/right, respectively:
|
||
|
||
* Left and Right cursor definitions that wrap to previous/next line
|
||
* like WordStar does
|
||
|
||
cursorleft
|
||
CursorLeft * try to go left
|
||
MacroQuitTrue * succeed! then we are done
|
||
CursorUp * else try to go to prev line
|
||
MacroQuitFalse * if fail, then at top of file. done.
|
||
EndLine * jump to end of previous line.
|
||
|
||
cursorright
|
||
isEndLine * are we at end of line?
|
||
JTrue down: * if so, go to down
|
||
CursorRight * else right one
|
||
MacroQuit * Quit macro
|
||
down:
|
||
CursorDown * try to go to next line
|
||
MacroQuitFalse * if not, go to end
|
||
BegLine * else go to beginning of line
|
||
|
||
|
||
Refer to the "Keyboard Configuration" section of Chapter 2 for more
|
||
information on changing key/command assignments.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* CursorUp <Cursor Up>, CursorDown <Cursor Down>
|
||
These commands move the cursor up or down in the file one line at a
|
||
time. The cursor's column position does not change.
|
||
|
||
* GotoColumn <Esc><S><G>
|
||
Upon entering the GotoColumn command, the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Go to column: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Type a column number and press <Enter>. The cursor then moves to the
|
||
specified column number.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Using Windows
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides the ability to view different areas of files (either
|
||
multiple files or the same file) at the same time, through the use of
|
||
windows. A window is a portion of the screen that allows you to view
|
||
text. You can divide your screen into as many as eight horizontal
|
||
windows. You can then view as many as eight different files through
|
||
these windows or have multiple views of a single file. This capability
|
||
can be quite helpful for comparing text, copying text, and moving text.
|
||
|
||
An example of a screen split into three windows is shown below.
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ L 1 C 1 IAW 411K *c:\file1 ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ This window is a view of file number 1 at line number 1. ³
|
||
³ This file is being edited with Insert, AutoIndent, and ³
|
||
³ WordWrap modes all ON. This file has been updated. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ L 483 C 12 IAW 411K *c:\file1 ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ This window is a view of file number 1 at line number 483. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ L 15 C 14 I 411K c:\file2 ³
|
||
³ Ü ³
|
||
³ This window is a view of file number 2. ³
|
||
³ This file is being edited with Insert mode ON, while ³
|
||
³ AutoIndent and WordWrap modes are OFF. This file has not ³
|
||
³ been updated. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Creating Windows
|
||
|
||
To create a window, use the HorizontalWindow <Ctrl O H> command. The
|
||
screen will be split into two halves, or windows, each window having its
|
||
own StatusLine. The cursor will reside in the newly created window,
|
||
making it the current window.
|
||
|
||
If only one file is being edited, the newly created window will simply
|
||
be an additional view of the same file. The editor will not load more
|
||
than one copy of the same file.
|
||
|
||
If multiple files are being edited, the newly created window will be a
|
||
view of the next file in the ring. (Refer to the "Multiple Files"
|
||
section in this chapter.) If desired, you can configure the editor to
|
||
prompt for the name of the file to be viewed in the new window instead
|
||
of the editor automatically selecting the next file in the ring. Refer
|
||
to the "General Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
Once the screen has been split into windows, entering the
|
||
HorizontalWindow command again will affect the current window. All
|
||
other windows will remain unchanged.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Switching Windows
|
||
|
||
When multiple windows are opened, editing will take place only in the
|
||
current window (the window containing the cursor). For editing text in
|
||
other windows, two commands are provided to switch from one window to
|
||
another.
|
||
|
||
* PrevWindow <Ctrl O P>
|
||
This command moves the cursor to the window above the current window.
|
||
If the current window is at the top of the screen, the cursor moves to
|
||
the last window on the screen.
|
||
|
||
* NextWindow <Ctrl O N>
|
||
This command moves the cursor to the window below the current window.
|
||
If the current window is at the bottom of the screen, the cursor moves
|
||
to the first window on the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Changing Window Size
|
||
|
||
You can change the size of any window on the screen with the commands
|
||
below.
|
||
|
||
* GrowWindow <Ctrl O G>, ShrinkWindow <Ctrl O S>, ResizeWindow <Esc><W><R>
|
||
These commands allow you to change the size of the current window.
|
||
Upon entering any of these commands, you are prompted to change the
|
||
size of the window by using the cursor up and cursor down keys.
|
||
|
||
* ZoomWindow <Ctrl O Z>
|
||
This command causes the current window to fill the entire screen, as
|
||
all other windows disappear. To restore the screen with all windows,
|
||
simply press <Ctrl O Z> again. Be careful not to confuse this command
|
||
with the OneWindow command (see below). OneWindow fills the screen
|
||
with the current window (like ZoomWindow does), but it also closes all
|
||
windows except the current one. ZoomWindow leaves the other windows
|
||
intact, even though they are hidden from view.
|
||
|
||
* MaximizeWindow <Ctrl O M>
|
||
This command causes the current window to be made as large as
|
||
possible, by making all other windows as small as possible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Closing Windows
|
||
|
||
There are two commands to close windows.
|
||
|
||
* CloseWindow <Ctrl O C>
|
||
This command closes the current window. The current window disappears
|
||
and the cursor is placed in the window above the closed window, making
|
||
it the new current window. When the closed window is at the top of the
|
||
screen, the window below it becomes the new current window.
|
||
|
||
* OneWindow <Ctrl O O>
|
||
This command closes all windows except the current window. The
|
||
current window then fills the entire screen.
|
||
|
||
Note that closing a window does not discard files from the editor.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Synchronized Scrolling in Windows
|
||
|
||
You can scroll simultaneously through multiple windows by setting
|
||
Synchronized Scrolling mode ON. This causes cursor movement and
|
||
scrolling activity in the current window to also occur in each of the
|
||
non-current windows.
|
||
|
||
* ToggleSyncScroll <Ctrl O Y>
|
||
This command switches Synchronized Scrolling mode ON and OFF.
|
||
|
||
When this mode is ON, the editor attempts to synchronize logical
|
||
cursor movement, as well as scrolling, in all windows, based on cursor
|
||
movement and scrolling activity in the current window. However, the
|
||
logical cursor position and size of non-current windows may affect
|
||
scrolling that occurs when the cursor reaches a window edge. Under
|
||
certain conditions, movement of the cursor may cause scrolling to
|
||
occur in some non-current windows before it begins in the current
|
||
window.
|
||
|
||
When Synchronized Scrolling mode is ON, an "S" appears on the
|
||
StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
|
||
FINDING AND REPLACING TEXT
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Finding Text
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
* Find <Ctrl Q F>
|
||
This command searches for a specific string of characters in the file.
|
||
Upon entering the Find command, the editor prompts for the string of
|
||
characters for which to search.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Search for: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the desired string of characters and press <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
The editor then prompts for the search options to use.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Options [BGLIW] (Back Global Local Ignore-case Whole-words): ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the letter(s) corresponding to the option(s) you want and press
|
||
<Enter>. The available options are:
|
||
|
||
[B] = Search backward from the current cursor position. When you
|
||
choose "B", the editor searches backward from the cursor
|
||
position toward the beginning of the file. Otherwise, it
|
||
searches from the cursor position toward the end of the file.
|
||
|
||
[G] = Global search. Begins searching from the beginning of the
|
||
file, or from the beginning of the marked Block if the [L]
|
||
option is also selected.
|
||
|
||
[L] = Local search. Limits the search to the currently marked
|
||
Block. If the cursor is outside the marked Block, or the [G]
|
||
option is also selected, the search starts at the beginning of
|
||
the marked Block. Otherwise, the search starts at the current
|
||
cursor position inside the marked Block.
|
||
|
||
[I] = Ignore the case (capital or lowercase) of the search string.
|
||
For example, "Hello" would match "hello" if this option is
|
||
chosen. This option is set ON by default.
|
||
|
||
[W] = Search for whole words only. For example, when this option is
|
||
chosen, the word "sent" matches only the actual word "sent".
|
||
Otherwise, any other words that contain the string (such as
|
||
"sentence" or "absent") would also match.
|
||
|
||
[^] = Anchor the search string to the beginning of the line (or
|
||
Block). The search operation attempts to locate a matching
|
||
string that begins in column 1 of a line; or, if the [L]
|
||
option is also selected, it attempts to locate a matching
|
||
string that begins in the first column of the Block.
|
||
|
||
[$] = Anchor the search string to the end of the line (or Block).
|
||
The search operation attempts to locate a matching string that
|
||
ends on the last character of a line; or, if the [L] option is
|
||
also selected, it attempts to locate a matching string that
|
||
ends on the last character in the Block (or that ends on the
|
||
last character of a line, if the line ends in the Block).
|
||
|
||
|
||
Once the Find command is executed, the cursor is placed at the first
|
||
occurrence of the search string found in the text. To locate
|
||
subsequent occurrences of the search string, simply enter the
|
||
RepeatFind command (described below).
|
||
|
||
If you want to search for a string and replace it with another string,
|
||
refer to the "Replacing Text" section in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ The placement of the found text is configurable. It can ³
|
||
³ either be placed on the same relative row on which the ³
|
||
³ cursor line initially started, or centered. Refer to the ³
|
||
³ ToggleCenterFinds command in Chapter 3, and to the option ³
|
||
³ "Should Find and RepeatFind center the found text" in the ³
|
||
³ "General Options" section of Chapter 2. On the menus, ³
|
||
³ press <Esc><S><C>. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* RepeatFind <Ctrl L>
|
||
This command reissues the last search command that was executed; that
|
||
is, the last Find, FindReplace, or IncrementalSearch command. It
|
||
begins searching one position beyond the current cursor position if a
|
||
forward search had previously been performed, or one position before
|
||
the current cursor position if a backward search had previously been
|
||
performed. All search or replace options, other than [G] (Global),
|
||
that were in effect for the previous execution of the operation, are
|
||
in effect for RepeatFind.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* IncrementalSearch <Ctrl I>
|
||
This is a specialized search command. It causes the editor to begin
|
||
searching for a string while you type. As you enter each new
|
||
character, the editor attempts to locate a string in the text that
|
||
matches the incremented search string. If you type a character that
|
||
would expand the search string to a string that cannot be matched in
|
||
the text, that character is not added to the search string.
|
||
|
||
When you execute IncrementalSearch, the editor displays the following
|
||
prompt on the StatusLine:
|
||
|
||
I-Search (^N=Next ^P=Prev ^B=Beginning):
|
||
|
||
Enter the string to be located. The cursor remains in the
|
||
IncrementalSearch prompt until you terminate the operation by pressing
|
||
<Enter> or <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
As you type characters, a case-insensitive, forward search is
|
||
performed, beginning at the text position where the cursor was located
|
||
when you invoked IncrementalSearch. As each matching string is found,
|
||
the string is highlighted in the text. When a search character is
|
||
entered that does not match the next character of the
|
||
currently-located text, the editor searches forward and moves to the
|
||
first occurrence that does match the newly-expanded search string. If
|
||
a match including that character cannot be located, the character is
|
||
rejected and the currently-located text remains highlighted.
|
||
|
||
Within the IncrementalSearch prompt, you can use the following keys to
|
||
perform the operations indicated:
|
||
|
||
<Backspace> Deletes the last character typed within the
|
||
IncrementalSearch prompt. The editor re-locates the
|
||
previously-highlighted string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl N> Searches forward for the next occurrence of the
|
||
current IncrementalSearch string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl P> Searches backward for the previous occurrence of the
|
||
current IncrementalSearch string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl B> Searches forward from the beginning of the file for
|
||
the first occurrence of the current IncrementalSearch
|
||
string.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Match <Alt F3>
|
||
This is a specialized search command. It acts only on the characters
|
||
( ), { }, [ ], and < >. With the cursor placed on one of these
|
||
characters, enter the Match command. The editor locates the logical
|
||
matching character of the pair. This command can be useful for
|
||
programming in languages where complicated expressions are grouped
|
||
using these characters.
|
||
|
||
|
||
In the default configuration of the editor, a useful macro for locating
|
||
text has been assigned to <Alt =>. This macro will take the word at the
|
||
current cursor position in the text, and execute the Find command on
|
||
that word. It searches for the next occurrence of the word, using the
|
||
"Default Find options" (as described under "General Options" in Chapter
|
||
2, "Customizing the Editor"). When located, the cursor is placed in the
|
||
text on the first character of the word and the word is highlighted. If
|
||
the cursor is not located on a word when you execute this macro, the
|
||
editor executes the Find command itself, and displays the standard Find
|
||
prompt.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Replacing Text
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides the ability to search for specific strings of
|
||
characters throughout your text and then replace all, some, or none of
|
||
them with another string of characters. (If you want to search for
|
||
strings of characters without replacing them, use the Find command.)
|
||
|
||
* FindReplace <Ctrl Q A>
|
||
This command searches for a specific string of characters in the
|
||
current file, and optionally replaces it with another string of
|
||
characters.
|
||
|
||
Upon entering the FindReplace command, the editor prompts for the
|
||
string of characters for which to search.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Search for: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the desired string of characters and press <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
The editor then prompts for a new string of characters (to replace the
|
||
old string).
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Replace with: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the new string of characters and press <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
The editor then prompts for the search options you wish to use.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Options [BGLIWN] (Back Global Local Ignore-case Whole-words ³
|
||
³No-prompting): ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Enter the letter(s) corresponding to the option(s) you want and press
|
||
<Enter>. The available search options are the same as those described
|
||
in the previous section ("Finding Text") for the Find command, as well
|
||
as the following additional replace options:
|
||
|
||
[N] = Find and replace with NO prompting. If you choose "N", the
|
||
editor finds and replaces every occurrence of the search
|
||
string, without asking you if you want to replace each
|
||
individual occurrence.
|
||
|
||
[#] = Replace the indicated number of times (where "#" is an actual
|
||
number). If you specify a number, the editor finds and
|
||
replaces the next "#" number of occurrences of the search
|
||
string, without asking you if you want to replace each
|
||
occurrence. For example, if you enter "8", the next eight
|
||
occurrences of the string are automatically replaced.
|
||
|
||
|
||
If you select the [N] or [#] option, the editor finds and replaces
|
||
every occurrence of the search string with no further user
|
||
intervention. If you DO NOT select the [N] or [#] option, the editor
|
||
prompts at every occurrence of the search string with:
|
||
|
||
Replace (Yes/No/Only/Rest/Quit):
|
||
|
||
Valid responses are:
|
||
|
||
<Y>es - Replace the search string with the new string and
|
||
continue to the next occurrence.
|
||
<N>o - Do not replace the search string, but continue to the
|
||
next occurrence.
|
||
<O>nly - Replace the search string with the new string and
|
||
quit.
|
||
<R>est - Replace the search string with the new string and
|
||
replace the rest of the occurrences with no further
|
||
prompts.
|
||
<Q>uit - Cancel the FindReplace process.
|
||
|
||
You can press <Ctrl Break> to halt a global FindReplace.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The RepeatFind command reissues the previous search command (including
|
||
FindReplace). Refer to RepeatFind in the previous section, "Finding
|
||
Text".
|
||
|
||
|
||
COPYING, MOVING, CHANGING, AND DELETING TEXT
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Block Commands
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
In this section, we will see how to mark and manipulate Blocks. A Block
|
||
is some portion of the text file which has been specifically delineated
|
||
using the Block-marking commands. We will see how to manipulate Blocks
|
||
both directly and through the use of intermediate storage areas known as
|
||
buffers.
|
||
|
||
The editor contains a rich set of Block commands. There are commands to
|
||
mark Blocks by lines, columns, and characters. There are commands to
|
||
copy, move, shift, and delete Blocks. These commands are very useful
|
||
for transferring text from one file to another. There are also
|
||
cut-and-paste commands, as well as commands to move Blocks to and from
|
||
named Scratch Buffers.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Marking and Unmarking a Block
|
||
|
||
Before you can manipulate a Block, you must first "mark" the Block,
|
||
either by characters, lines, or columns. The type of Block that you
|
||
mark will depend on the editing situation and what you find most
|
||
comfortable.
|
||
|
||
* MarkLine <Alt L>
|
||
This command allows you to mark a Block in whole line increments. In
|
||
other words, the Block will contain complete lines only and no
|
||
portions of lines. To use this command place the cursor anywhere on
|
||
the first line of the text you wish to mark and press <Alt L>. (Notice
|
||
that the line is immediately marked.) Now, move the cursor (the Block
|
||
will "follow" the cursor) to the last line of text to be marked and
|
||
press <Alt L> again. You now have a marked Block, ready for
|
||
manipulation.
|
||
|
||
* DropAnchor <Alt A>
|
||
This command allows you to mark a Block one character at a time. In
|
||
other words, the Block will contain a stream of characters (which can
|
||
span over multiple lines). To use this command place the cursor over
|
||
the first character of the text you wish to mark and press <Alt A>.
|
||
Then begin moving the cursor toward the end of the text to be marked.
|
||
Notice that the Block "follows" the cursor position. Once the cursor
|
||
is placed over the last character to be marked, press <Alt A> again.
|
||
You now have a marked Block, ready for manipulation.
|
||
|
||
* MarkCharacter
|
||
This command works just like DropAnchor except that while marking the
|
||
Block, the cursor is not included within the Block.
|
||
|
||
MarkCharacter is provided as a replacement for the DropAnchor command.
|
||
If you want the cursor position included in character Blocks, then
|
||
continue to use DropAnchor; otherwise, replace the DropAnchor command
|
||
with this command in the QCONFIG.DAT file. Refer to the "Keyboard
|
||
Configuration" section of Chapter 2 for more information on changing
|
||
key/command assignments.
|
||
|
||
The MarkCharacter command can also be used to provide CUA-style Block
|
||
marking, using the shifted cursor keys. Refer to the following
|
||
section, "CUA-Style Block Marking."
|
||
|
||
* MarkColumn <Alt K>
|
||
This command allows you to mark one or more columns of text. To use
|
||
this command place the cursor over the upper left-hand character of
|
||
the text you wish to mark and press <Alt K>. Then begin moving the
|
||
cursor to the right and/or downward. Notice that the Block "follows"
|
||
the cursor position. Once the cursor is placed over the lower
|
||
right-hand character of the Block, press <Alt K> again. You now have
|
||
a marked Block, ready for manipulation.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ When using the MarkLine, MarkCharacter, MarkColumn, and ³
|
||
³ DropAnchor commands, it is not necessary to mark the end ³
|
||
³ of the Block. The editor assumes the end of the Block to ³
|
||
³ be the current cursor position for MarkCharacter, ³
|
||
³ MarkColumn, and DropAnchor, and to be the current cursor ³
|
||
³ line for MarkLine. Marking the end of the Block is only ³
|
||
³ necessary when moving or copying text within the same ³
|
||
³ file. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* MarkWord <Ctrl K T>
|
||
This command allows you to mark the current word. To use this
|
||
command, place the cursor anywhere in the word you wish to mark and
|
||
press <Ctrl K T>. The entire word is immediately marked. If there is
|
||
no word at the current cursor position, then no action is taken.
|
||
|
||
* MarkBlockBegin <Ctrl K B>, MarkBlockEnd <Ctrl K K>
|
||
This is another method of marking a Block one character at a time. To
|
||
mark a Block with this command, place the cursor over the first
|
||
character of the text you wish to mark and press <Ctrl K B>. Then
|
||
position the cursor one character past the end of the text that is to
|
||
be marked and press <Ctrl K K>. The Block is now marked and ready for
|
||
manipulation.
|
||
|
||
* UnmarkBlock <Alt U>
|
||
Entering the UnmarkBlock command causes the currently marked Block to
|
||
be unmarked.
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to mark one Block at a time. If you mark a Block
|
||
and then go elsewhere in the file and attempt to mark another Block, the
|
||
editor will simply extend the first Block by including all the text
|
||
between the original Block and the current cursor position. If you mark
|
||
a Block in one file and then go to another file and mark a Block, the
|
||
Block in the first file will automatically be unmarked.
|
||
|
||
Also, if you mix types of Block marking (for example, by entering
|
||
MarkLine followed by DropAnchor), the editor will mark the Block
|
||
according to the last command entered.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CUA-Style Block Marking
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to use the following CUA-style shifted cursor keys
|
||
for marking character Blocks. These pre-defined keys use the
|
||
MarkCharacter command to create Blocks that do not include the cursor
|
||
within the Block.
|
||
|
||
CUA-style Key Block-marking Operation
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
<Shift Cursor Left> Mark/extend Block and move left one character
|
||
<Shift Cursor Right> Mark/extend Block and move right one character
|
||
<Shift Cursor Up> Mark/extend Block and move up one line
|
||
<Shift Cursor Down> Mark/extend Block and move down one line
|
||
<Shift Home> Mark/extend Block and move to beginning of line
|
||
<Shift End> Mark/extend Block and move to end of line
|
||
<Shift PgUp> Mark/extend Block and move up one page
|
||
<Shift PgDn> Mark/extend Block and move down one page
|
||
|
||
To select the CUA-style Block-marking keys, you must set CUA-Style Block
|
||
Marking mode ON. (You can do this by setting the configuration option
|
||
"Use CUA-style (shift cursor) block marking" to <Y>. Refer to the
|
||
"Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2. You can also switch this mode
|
||
ON and OFF using the ToggleCUAMarking command.) These CUA-style keys
|
||
will then override any command assignments made to the same keys in
|
||
QCONFIG.DAT.
|
||
|
||
In addition to the CUA-style Block marking keys, you may want to
|
||
configure the editor to assign the following CUA-style keys to the
|
||
indicated Block commands:
|
||
|
||
CUA-style
|
||
Key Block Command / Operation
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
<Shift Ins> Paste / paste contents of Scrap Buffer at cursor position
|
||
<Shift Del> Cut / cut marked Block to Scrap Buffer
|
||
<Ctrl Ins> Copy / copy marked Block to Scrap Buffer
|
||
<Ctrl Del> DeleteBlock / delete marked Block
|
||
|
||
For these CUA-style Block command key assignments to be effective, they
|
||
must be assigned in QCONFIG.DAT and burned into the editor. Unlike the
|
||
CUA-style Block-marking keys, setting ON CUA-Style Block Marking mode
|
||
does NOT automatically make these Block-command keys effective.
|
||
|
||
The following paragraphs describe certain effects of CUA-Style Block
|
||
Marking mode.
|
||
|
||
If the <Shift> key is released during marking, it must be pressed again,
|
||
before any other key is pressed, in order to continue marking.
|
||
|
||
If you press any key that is not a CUA-style marking keys (or that is
|
||
not one of the related CUA-style Block command keys, as described
|
||
above), the current Block will be unmarked. You can override this
|
||
"unmarking" behavior by setting the configuration option "Should blocks
|
||
remain marked after CUA marking" to <Y>. Then a marked Block will
|
||
remain marked until you unmark it, or until you execute a command, such
|
||
as Cut, that unmarks the Block after its operation. (Refer to the
|
||
"Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2 for information on setting this
|
||
option.)
|
||
|
||
Once a "persistent" Block is marked, you can extend the Block by placing
|
||
the cursor at either the beginning or ending position of the Block, and
|
||
then pressing one of the CUA-style Block-marking keys. If you press one
|
||
of the CUA-style marking keys with the cursor at any other position in
|
||
the file, the current Block will be unmarked, and a new Block will be
|
||
started at the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Directly
|
||
|
||
There a several ways to manipulate a marked Block in the editor. The
|
||
following commands act directly on a marked Block.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ When Copying or Moving Blocks: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Blocks marked using the DropAnchor, MarkCharacter, ³
|
||
³ MarkColumn, and MarkBlockBegin/End commands will always be ³
|
||
³ inserted beginning at the current cursor position. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Blocks marked using the MarkLine command will be inserted ³
|
||
³ at either the line before or the line after the current ³
|
||
³ cursor line. Refer to the "General Options" section of ³
|
||
³ Chapter 2 for more information. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* CopyBlock <Alt C>
|
||
This command makes a copy of the marked Block and inserts it where you
|
||
indicate. You can insert this copy of the Block at some other place
|
||
in the same file or in another file. The original Block of text, from
|
||
which you made the copy, is not affected.
|
||
|
||
To use this command, first mark the Block as described above. Next,
|
||
move the cursor to the position in the file where you wish to insert
|
||
the marked text. (Or, if you have multiple files loaded and wish to
|
||
copy text from one file to another, use the NextFile, PrevFile or
|
||
EditFile commands to get a new current file and likewise position the
|
||
cursor.) Now enter the CopyBlock <Alt C> command. The Block will be
|
||
inserted at the new position. You may notice, after you use
|
||
CopyBlock, that the newly inserted Block of text is now marked and the
|
||
original Block is unmarked. To unmark the copied Block, enter the
|
||
UnmarkBlock command.
|
||
|
||
For an easy method to copy the same Block repeatedly, refer to the
|
||
Copy and Paste commands in the following section.
|
||
|
||
* CopyOverBlock <Alt Z>
|
||
This command is for use with column Blocks only. It works just like
|
||
CopyBlock except the Block is copied to the current cursor position by
|
||
overlaying existing text and without shifting text to the right.
|
||
|
||
* MoveBlock <Alt M>
|
||
This command works exactly like CopyBlock with one exception: upon
|
||
entering the MoveBlock <Alt M> command, the originally marked Block is
|
||
deleted from the file.
|
||
|
||
As with the CopyBlock command, you can move a Block to another part of
|
||
the same file or from one file to another.
|
||
|
||
For an easy method to delete a Block from its original position and
|
||
inserting it repeatedly at other positions, refer to the Cut and Paste
|
||
commands in the following section.
|
||
|
||
* DeleteBlock <Alt G>
|
||
This command simply deletes a marked Block of text from the file. To
|
||
use this command, first mark a Block of text to be deleted, then enter
|
||
the DeleteBlock command. The marked text will be deleted from the
|
||
file. (Deleted Blocks will be placed in the Kill buffer. Refer
|
||
to "The Kill Buffer - A Safety Net" section in this chapter for
|
||
more information.)
|
||
|
||
* ShiftLeft <Shift F7>, ShiftRight <Shift F8>
|
||
These commands allow the User to shift text contained in a Block to
|
||
the left or right. To use these commands, first mark a Block. Now
|
||
enter ShiftLeft or ShiftRight. The entire marked Block of text will
|
||
be shifted one column to the left or right respectively. If there is
|
||
no marked Block of text or the cursor is outside of the marked Block,
|
||
the current cursor line will be shifted. This command is very useful
|
||
for changing indentation for portions of text or source code.
|
||
|
||
* FillBlock <Ctrl K L>
|
||
This command allows you to fill a marked Block with a single
|
||
character.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Using Scrap Buffers
|
||
|
||
The editor provides an extremely helpful device for quickly manipulating
|
||
Blocks of text. This device consists of a Scrap Buffer and several
|
||
commands which act on the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
The Scrap Buffer is a temporary holding area for marked Blocks of text.
|
||
The commands Cut, Copy, Paste, and PasteOver are used solely for placing
|
||
text into the Scrap Buffer and copying text from the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
When you issue a Copy or Cut command (discussed in the following
|
||
section), the marked Block is placed into the Scrap Buffer. The next
|
||
time you Copy or Cut a Block into the Scrap Buffer, the previous
|
||
contents of the Scrap Buffer are deleted and replaced with the new
|
||
Block.
|
||
|
||
You can repeatedly use the Paste and PasteOver commands as many times as
|
||
needed to insert a copy of the Block held in the Scrap Buffer at
|
||
multiple positions in your file or files. The Paste and PasteOver
|
||
commands do not purge the contents of the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Copy <Grey +> and Paste <Grey *> / PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc>
|
||
To copy a section of text from its present position and insert it
|
||
somewhere else:
|
||
|
||
1. Mark the text using the Block marking commands.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter Copy <Grey +>. This places a copy of the marked text into
|
||
the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
3. If you want to insert the text somewhere else within the same file,
|
||
use the cursor movement commands to place the cursor where you wish
|
||
to insert the text.
|
||
|
||
4. If you want to insert the text in another file, switch to that file
|
||
using the NextFile, PrevFile, or EditFile command to access that
|
||
file. Then place the cursor at the desired position.
|
||
|
||
5. Enter Paste <Grey *> to insert the text. If you have copied a
|
||
column Block into the Scrap Buffer and wish to insert it by
|
||
overlaying existing text then use PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc> instead of
|
||
Paste.
|
||
|
||
Since Paste and PasteOver leave the contents of the Scrap Buffer
|
||
intact, you can make multiple insertions in the same or different
|
||
files. Simply move the cursor to the file and position where you wish
|
||
to make additional insertions and enter Paste <Grey *> or PasteOver
|
||
<Ctrl PrtSc>. Please note that the next time you issue a Cut or Copy
|
||
command, the previous contents of the Scrap Buffer will be discarded.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Cut <Grey -> and Paste <Grey *> / PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc>
|
||
Cut and Paste/PasteOver work exactly like Copy and Paste/PasteOver
|
||
except that Cut will delete the marked Block from the file. You can
|
||
still make multiple insertions of the text using the Paste or
|
||
PasteOver Commands.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ The editor can be configured to have the Cut and Copy ³
|
||
³ commands act on the current cursor line if no Block is ³
|
||
³ marked. Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of ³
|
||
³ Chapter 2 for more information. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Manipulating Blocks Using Scratch Buffers
|
||
|
||
A Scratch Buffer is a special type of buffer to which you assign a name.
|
||
The editor allows you to create and name up to 99 Scratch Buffers for
|
||
each editing session. These can be useful if you have several different
|
||
Blocks of text that you want to insert in multiple locations. The
|
||
commands StoreScrBuff <Ctrl B S>, AppendScrBuff <Ctrl B A>, and
|
||
GetScrBuff <Ctrl B L> are used to place text in, and retrieve text from,
|
||
a Scratch Buffer. Whenever you issue one of these commands, the editor
|
||
will ask you for the name of the Scratch Buffer. If you want to use an
|
||
already created scratch buffer, and do not remember the name, just press
|
||
<Enter> on an empty prompt (press the DelLine key to quickly remove any
|
||
text in a prompt) and a list of existing Scratch Buffers will be shown,
|
||
allowing you to select the appropriate one. Finally, you can remove a
|
||
Scratch Buffer, if it is no longer needed, with the DelScratchBuff
|
||
<Ctrl B D> command.
|
||
|
||
The contents of all Scratch Buffers are discarded when the editor is
|
||
terminated.
|
||
|
||
* StoreScrBuff <Ctrl B S>, AppendScrBuff <Ctrl B A>
|
||
|
||
To place a Block of text into a named buffer:
|
||
|
||
1. Mark the Block.
|
||
|
||
2. If you want to create a new Scratch Buffer containing the marked
|
||
Block, execute StoreScrBuff <Ctrl B S>. (This command is also used
|
||
if you wish to replace the current contents of a Scratch Buffer
|
||
with the marked Block.) If you want to append the marked Block to
|
||
the current contents of the Scratch Buffer, execute AppendScrBuff
|
||
<Ctrl B A>.
|
||
|
||
3. The editor prompts for the name of the Scratch Buffer.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Store (Append) to buffer: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
4. Enter a name. It is best to use a name which reflects the contents
|
||
of the buffer and is easily remembered. Or press <Enter> to get a
|
||
list of existing Scratch Buffers, if you cannot remember the name
|
||
and want to use an existing Buffer.
|
||
|
||
The Block is now stored in a Scratch Buffer under the assigned name.
|
||
|
||
* GetScrBuff <Ctrl B L>
|
||
To retrieve the contents of a named Scratch Buffer and insert it at
|
||
the current cursor position:
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor where you wish the contents of the named
|
||
Scratch Buffer to be inserted.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter GetScrBuff <Ctrl B L>. The editor prompts for the name of
|
||
the Scratch Buffer to be retrieved.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Get from buffer: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
3. Enter the name of the desired Scratch Buffer, or press <Enter> to
|
||
choose from a list of existing Scratch Buffers.
|
||
|
||
4. Repeat the above steps whenever you want to insert the contents
|
||
of a Scratch Buffer into your text.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Accessing the Microsoft Windows Clipboard
|
||
|
||
The following handy commands allow you to copy or paste text between the
|
||
current file and the Microsoft Windows Clipboard.
|
||
|
||
* WinClipCopy
|
||
This command makes a copy of the marked Block and inserts it directly
|
||
into the Microsoft Windows Clipboard.
|
||
|
||
* WinClipPaste
|
||
This command inserts a copy of the contents of the Microsoft Windows
|
||
Clipboard directly into the current file at the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Note that the OS/2 version of the editor allows you to access the OS/2
|
||
Clipboard.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Examples of Block Commands
|
||
|
||
This section contains examples of commonly used Block Commands.
|
||
|
||
* Copying or moving a Block within the same file.
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the Block to be copied or
|
||
moved.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter DropAnchor <Alt A> to mark a stream of characters, or
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> to mark whole lines, or MarkColumn <Alt K> to mark
|
||
a column of text.
|
||
|
||
3. Position the cursor at the end of the Block to be copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
4. Enter DropAnchor, MarkLine, or MarkColumn again to mark the end of
|
||
the Block.
|
||
|
||
5. Move the cursor to the location where you want to insert the marked
|
||
Block.
|
||
|
||
6. Enter CopyBlock <Alt C>, CopyOverBlock <Alt Z> (column Blocks
|
||
only), or MoveBlock <Alt M>.
|
||
|
||
7. Enter UnmarkBlock <Alt U> to unmark the Block.
|
||
|
||
The Block has now been copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Copying or moving a Block to another file.
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the Block to be copied or
|
||
moved.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter DropAnchor <Alt A> to mark a stream of characters, or
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> to mark whole lines, or MarkColumn <Alt K> to mark
|
||
a column of text.
|
||
|
||
3. Position the cursor at the end of the Block to be copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
4. Switch to the "target" file using the file commands EditFile,
|
||
NextFile, or PrevFile.
|
||
|
||
5. Move the cursor to the location in the file where you want to
|
||
insert the marked Block.
|
||
|
||
6. Enter CopyBlock <Alt C>, CopyOverBlock <Alt Z> (column Blocks
|
||
only), or MoveBlock <Alt M>.
|
||
|
||
7. Enter UnmarkBlock <Alt U> to unmark the Block.
|
||
|
||
The Block has now been copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Copying or moving a Block for multiple insertions in the same file.
|
||
|
||
If you want to insert the same Block at several positions within a
|
||
file, follow these steps:
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the Block to be copied or
|
||
moved.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter DropAnchor <Alt A> to mark a stream of characters, or
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> to mark whole lines, or MarkColumn <Alt K> to mark
|
||
a column of text.
|
||
|
||
3. Position the cursor at the end of the Block to be copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
4. If you want to leave the Block in its original position and insert
|
||
copies of it at other locations, then enter Copy <Grey +>.
|
||
|
||
If you want to delete the Block from its original position and
|
||
insert copies of it at other locations, then enter Cut <Grey ->.
|
||
|
||
The Block is now stored in the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
5. Move the cursor to the location in the file where you want to
|
||
insert the Block.
|
||
|
||
6. Enter Paste <Grey *> or PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc> (column Blocks
|
||
only).
|
||
|
||
The Block is now inserted. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for each additional
|
||
insertion.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Copying or moving a Block for multiple insertions in more than one
|
||
file.
|
||
|
||
If you want to insert the same Block at several positions in more than
|
||
one file, follow these steps:
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the Block to be copied or
|
||
moved.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter DropAnchor <Alt A> to mark a stream of characters, or
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> to mark whole lines, or MarkColumn <Alt K> to mark
|
||
a column of text.
|
||
|
||
3. Position the cursor at the end of the Block to be copied or moved.
|
||
|
||
4. If you want to leave the Block in its original position and insert
|
||
copies of it at other locations, then enter Copy <Grey +>.
|
||
|
||
If you want to delete the Block from its original position and
|
||
insert copies of it at other locations, then enter Cut <Grey ->.
|
||
|
||
The Block is now stored in the Scrap Buffer.
|
||
|
||
5. Switch to the "target" file using the file commands EditFile,
|
||
NextFile, or PrevFile.
|
||
|
||
6. Move the cursor to the location in the file where you want to
|
||
insert the Block.
|
||
|
||
7. Enter Paste <Grey *> or PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc> (column Blocks
|
||
only).
|
||
|
||
The Block is now inserted. Repeat steps 5-7 for each additional
|
||
insertion.
|
||
|
||
* Copying multiple Blocks for insertion in one or more files.
|
||
|
||
If you have several Blocks that you want to insert in several
|
||
different files, follow these steps:
|
||
|
||
1. Position the cursor at the beginning of the first Block.
|
||
|
||
2. Enter DropAnchor <Alt A> to mark a stream of characters, or
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> to mark whole lines, or MarkColumn <Alt K> to mark
|
||
a column of text.
|
||
|
||
3. Position the cursor at the end of the first Block.
|
||
|
||
4. Enter AppendScrBuff <Ctrl B A> if you want to append to an existing
|
||
Scratch Buffer. Otherwise, enter StoreScrBuff <Ctrl B S> to create
|
||
or overwrite an existing Scratch Buffer.
|
||
|
||
5. The editor will prompt for the name of the buffer. Enter a name.
|
||
(It is best to use a name which reflects the contents of the
|
||
buffer and is easily remembered).
|
||
|
||
The Block is now stored in a Scratch Buffer under the assigned
|
||
name. Repeat steps 1-5 for each additional Block you want to
|
||
store.
|
||
|
||
6. Switch to the "target" file using the file commands EditFile,
|
||
NextFile, or PrevFile.
|
||
|
||
7. Move the cursor to the location in the file where you want to
|
||
insert a Block.
|
||
|
||
8. Enter GetScrBuff <Ctrl B L>. The editor will prompt for the name
|
||
of the Scratch Buffer. Enter the name of the desired Scratch
|
||
Buffer for insertion.
|
||
|
||
Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each insertion of a stored Block.
|
||
|
||
Non-Block Commands
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
In addition to the editor's array of Block commands, there are also many
|
||
commands for manipulating your text which do not depend on marked
|
||
Blocks. This section explains non-Block commands.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Adding Text
|
||
|
||
* AddLine <F2>
|
||
As its name implies, this command inserts a blank line in the text.
|
||
The line is added immediately below the current cursor line. The
|
||
cursor is moved to the new line. The cursor column does not change.
|
||
|
||
* InsertLine <Alt F2>
|
||
This command inserts a blank line in the text above the cursor line.
|
||
The cursor remains on the new line and the cursor column does not
|
||
change.
|
||
|
||
* Literal <Ctrl P>
|
||
The Literal command is used to insert control characters into the
|
||
text. To use this command, enter <Ctrl P> followed by a control
|
||
character. The control character will be inserted into the text. For
|
||
example, to insert a formfeed character (ASCII 12) in the text, enter
|
||
<Ctrl P> <Ctrl L>.
|
||
|
||
This command is handy for entering the control characters represented
|
||
by ASCII decimal values 1 through 26. Simply enter <Ctrl P> followed
|
||
by <Ctrl A> for ASCII character 1, or <Ctrl B> for ASCII character 2
|
||
and so on, up to <Ctrl Z> for ASCII character 26.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ An alternate and perhaps easier method of entering control ³
|
||
³ characters or any ASCII character into your text is to ³
|
||
³ hold down the <Alt> key and enter the decimal equivalent ³
|
||
³ of the ASCII character using the numeric keypad. For ³
|
||
³ example, to insert a formfeed character (ASCII 12) in the ³
|
||
³ text, just enter <Alt 12> using the numeric keypad. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ If a linefeed character (ASCII 10) is entered, the editor ³
|
||
³ will split the line at this position the next time the ³
|
||
³ file is edited. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Another method for entering ASCII characters into the text ³
|
||
³ is to use the AsciiChart command, described below. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* AsciiChart <Esc><O><T>
|
||
Displays a scrollable ASCII chart on the screen. When the ASCII chart
|
||
is displayed, the cursor bar is located on the entry that corresponds
|
||
to the character at the cursor position in the text. If the cursor is
|
||
positioned in the text beyond the end of the line, the cursor bar is
|
||
located on the first item in the ASCII chart (the null character).
|
||
|
||
To place a display character from the ASCII chart into the text, scroll
|
||
the cursor bar to the desired entry and press <Enter>. The ASCII
|
||
chart is removed from the screen, and the selected character is placed
|
||
in the text at the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
To remove the ASCII chart from the screen without placing a character
|
||
into the text, press <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
* ToggleBoxDraw <Shift F1>
|
||
This is a specialized command which is really a mode of operation that
|
||
can be switched ON or OFF. If switched ON, the cursor movement keys
|
||
(up, down, right, left) can be used to "draw" lines in the text. This
|
||
can be very useful for creating graphs and tables. To switch Box
|
||
Drawing mode ON, enter <Shift F1>. To switch OFF, enter <Shift F1>
|
||
again. When Box Drawing mode is ON, a "B" appears on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
* ToggleEnterMatching <Esc><O><E>
|
||
This is also a specialized command which is really a mode of operation
|
||
that can be switched ON or OFF. If switched ON, the editor will
|
||
automatically insert into the text a corresponding ), ], }, or "
|
||
character each time a (, [, {, or " character, respectively, is
|
||
entered. To switch EnterMatching mode ON, enter <Esc><O><E>. To
|
||
switch OFF, enter <Esc><O><E> again.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Copying Text
|
||
|
||
* GetPrev <Ctrl - (dash)>
|
||
This command copies the character directly above the cursor onto the
|
||
cursor line. To get an idea of how this command works, place the
|
||
cursor at the beginning of any line which has text on the line
|
||
immediately above it. Now press <Ctrl - (dash)> and hold it down. The
|
||
cursor will move to the right while copying the the characters from
|
||
the line above.
|
||
|
||
* DupLine <F4>
|
||
This command simply makes a copy of the current cursor line and
|
||
inserts this copy on the line immediately below the cursor line. The
|
||
cursor is placed on the new line.
|
||
|
||
* Copy <Grey +>, Paste <Grey *>
|
||
Refer to the "Block Commands" section in this chapter for a complete
|
||
explanation of these commands. The commands are included here
|
||
because, if desired, the User can configure the editor so that these
|
||
commands act on the current cursor line in the same manner in which
|
||
they act on Blocks. For more information on how to configure this
|
||
option, refer to the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Moving Text
|
||
|
||
* Align
|
||
This command lines up the left-most character of the cursor line with
|
||
the left-most character of the line above it. This allows you to
|
||
align portions of text which require a common left margin. This
|
||
command also moves the cursor down one line; thus, large portions of
|
||
text can be aligned very quickly by entering this command and holding
|
||
the command key down.
|
||
|
||
* JoinLine <Alt J>
|
||
This command will join the following line to the end of the current
|
||
line. The cursor position does not change.
|
||
|
||
If the cursor is positioned on or before the last non-blank character
|
||
of the line, the line below will be appended immediately following the
|
||
last non-blank character.
|
||
|
||
If the cursor is positioned beyond the last non-blank character of the
|
||
line, the line below will be appended beginning at the current cursor
|
||
position.
|
||
|
||
If the line below the cursor line is blank, the blank line will be
|
||
deleted.
|
||
|
||
* Return <Enter>
|
||
Before reading the explanation of the Return command, it may be
|
||
helpful to review the discussion of Insert mode in the "Modes" section
|
||
in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
If the editor is in Insert mode, this command performs like the
|
||
SplitLine command; that is, all text on and to the right of the cursor
|
||
on the cursor line will be deleted and inserted on a new line
|
||
immediately below the cursor line. The cursor, however, will be
|
||
placed on the new line.
|
||
|
||
If the editor is not in Insert mode, this command will simply place
|
||
the cursor at the beginning of the line below the cursor line. No
|
||
text will be affected.
|
||
|
||
If the editor is in AutoIndent mode, the cursor will be placed at the
|
||
left margin instead of at the beginning of the line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ The editor can be configured so the Return command does ³
|
||
³ not split lines in Insert mode. Refer to the "Advanced ³
|
||
³ Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* SplitLine <Alt S>
|
||
This command will split the current line at the cursor position. The
|
||
cursor position will not change.
|
||
|
||
* SwapChars
|
||
This command will swap the character at the cursor position with the
|
||
character preceding the cursor. The cursor column position does not
|
||
change.
|
||
|
||
* SwapWords
|
||
This command will swap the word in which the cursor is positioned with
|
||
the previous word on the current line. Any "non-word" characters
|
||
between the affected words are preserved.
|
||
|
||
* SwapLines <Ctrl F2> or <Esc><E><P>
|
||
This command will swap the current line with the line immediately
|
||
following it. The cursor does not change its position relative to the
|
||
screen.
|
||
|
||
* Cut <Grey ->, Paste <Grey *>
|
||
Refer to the "Block Commands" section in this chapter for a complete
|
||
explanation of these commands. The commands are included here
|
||
because, if desired, you can configure the editor so that these
|
||
commands act on the current cursor line in the same manner in which
|
||
they act on Blocks. For more information on how to configure this
|
||
option, refer to the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
* ShiftLeft <Shift F7>, ShiftRight <Shift F8>
|
||
Refer to the "Block Commands" section in this chapter for a complete
|
||
explanation of these commands. The commands are included here
|
||
because, if there is no marked Block in the text, these commands will
|
||
act on the current cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Deleting And Undeleting Text
|
||
|
||
* Backspace <Backspace>, DelLtWord <Ctrl Backspace>
|
||
If Insert mode is ON, the Backspace command deletes the character to
|
||
the left of the cursor. The text to the right of the cursor is pulled
|
||
behind the cursor as it moves to the left. If the cursor is in column
|
||
one and you enter Backspace, the cursor line is appended to the line
|
||
immediately above.
|
||
|
||
If Insert mode is OFF, the Backspace command works the same as above
|
||
except the text to the right of the cursor is not pulled behind the
|
||
cursor as it moves left.
|
||
|
||
The DelLtWord command is a backspace for "words". It works just like
|
||
the Backspace command, except that it deletes all characters from the
|
||
cursor to the beginning of the previous word.
|
||
|
||
* DelCh <Del>, DelRtWord <Ctrl T>
|
||
DelCh will delete the character at the cursor position and pull the
|
||
text to the right of the cursor, one column to the left.
|
||
|
||
If the cursor position is to the right of the last non-blank character
|
||
on the cursor line, the line immediately below will be appended to the
|
||
cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The DelRtWord command is a character delete for "words". It works
|
||
just like the DelCh command, except that it deletes all characters
|
||
from the cursor to the beginning of the following word.
|
||
|
||
* DelToEol <F6>
|
||
This command deletes the character at the cursor position and all text
|
||
to the right of the cursor on the current cursor line. The cursor
|
||
position does not change.
|
||
|
||
* DelLine <Alt D>
|
||
This command deletes the current cursor line from the text. All text
|
||
below the deleted line is shifted up one line.
|
||
|
||
* UndoCursorline <Ctrl Q L>
|
||
This command allows you to reverse any changes you have made to the
|
||
cursor line. This can be helpful if you accidentally delete or change
|
||
part of a line, or you just change your mind and want the cursor line
|
||
back the way it was. This command must be issued before the cursor is
|
||
moved from the current cursor line and before any file or window
|
||
commands are entered. Changes made using the FindReplace command
|
||
cannot be reversed with this command.
|
||
|
||
* UnKill <Ctrl U>
|
||
This command allows you to retrieve text that has been deleted by the
|
||
DeleteBlock, DelLine, DelRtWord, or DelToEol commands. Refer to "The
|
||
Kill Buffer - A Safety Net" section in this chapter for a complete
|
||
explanation of the use of this command.
|
||
|
||
Changing Case
|
||
|
||
* Upper <Alt 1>
|
||
This command changes the current character to its upper-case
|
||
equivalent. If the cursor is in a Block when invoked, all characters
|
||
in the Block are upper-cased.
|
||
|
||
* Lower <Alt 2>
|
||
This command changes the current character to its lower-case
|
||
equivalent. If the cursor is in a Block when invoked, all characters
|
||
in the Block are lower-cased.
|
||
|
||
* Flip <Alt 3>
|
||
This command flips the case of the current character. If the cursor
|
||
is in a Block when invoked, all characters in the Block are flipped.
|
||
|
||
Sorting
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to sort a range of lines, using a column Block as
|
||
the key upon which the sort is based. In order to use the Sort feature,
|
||
mark a column Block indicating the key on which to sort, and then press
|
||
<Shift F3>.
|
||
|
||
The Sort can be configured (either interactively or by using the
|
||
configuration program, QCONFIG) to ignore or respect case, and to sort
|
||
in ascending or descending order.
|
||
|
||
* Sort <Shift F3> or <Esc><B><S>
|
||
Sorts all the lines spanned by a column Block, using the column
|
||
Block as the sort key.
|
||
|
||
* ToggleSortCaseInSensitive <Esc><B><I>
|
||
Toggles sort case sensitivity ON or OFF. Set this option ON to have
|
||
the Sort command ignore the case of characters when sorting; set this
|
||
option OFF to have the Sort command respect upper/lower case.
|
||
|
||
* ToggleSortDescending <Esc><B><N>
|
||
Toggles the sort order between ascending and descending. Set this
|
||
option OFF to sort in ascending order; set this option ON to sort in
|
||
descending order.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The Kill Buffer - A Safety Net
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor maintains a temporary storage area for deleted text. This
|
||
provides the User a safeguard against incorrectly or inadvertently
|
||
deleting text. This recovery mechanism is automatically in effect when
|
||
the editor is running. No action is required from the User until there
|
||
is a need to recover deleted text.
|
||
|
||
The temporary storage area is called the Kill Buffer. Text that has
|
||
been deleted by the following commands will be placed into the Kill
|
||
Buffer:
|
||
|
||
DeleteBlock <Alt G>
|
||
DelLine <Alt D>
|
||
DelRtWord <Ctrl T>
|
||
DelToEol <F6>
|
||
|
||
To understand how the Kill Buffer works and how text is recovered from
|
||
the Kill Buffer, refer to the following illustration:
|
||
|
||
|
||
The Kill Buffer
|
||
|
||
Entry Command
|
||
Number Entered Buffer Contents
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÂÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿ top
|
||
³ 4 ³ DelToEol ³ part of this line was deleted. ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ 3 ³ DelRtWord ³ word (1 word deleted) ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ 2 ³ DelLine ³ This entire line was deleted. ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ 1 ³ DelLine ³ This entire line was deleted. ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ empty ³ ³ ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÅÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ empty ³ ³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÁÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ bottom
|
||
|
||
|
||
Each time one of the text deletion commands is used, a new entry is made
|
||
in the Kill Buffer. In the above example, four deletion commands have
|
||
been issued. The text from these four commands has been stored in the
|
||
Kill Buffer from top to bottom. In other words, when the DelToEol
|
||
command was issued (entry #4), the first three entries were pushed
|
||
toward the bottom of the Kill Buffer and the newly deleted text was
|
||
entered at the top.
|
||
|
||
In the example, the Kill Buffer has enough room for six entries. When a
|
||
seventh entry is made, the oldest entry, or entry number one, will be
|
||
discarded from the Kill Buffer. Once discarded from the Kill Buffer,
|
||
that text can no longer be recovered.
|
||
|
||
To recover deleted text, the UnKill <Ctrl U> command is used. Each time
|
||
the UnKill command is issued the most recent entry (the "top" entry of
|
||
the Kill Buffer) is retrieved and restored to the file. This entry is
|
||
then deleted from the Kill Buffer, and all remaining entries move toward
|
||
the top of the buffer by one position. In the example, the first time
|
||
the UnKill command is issued, entry #4 will be recovered. Next, entry
|
||
#3 will be recovered, and so on. Thus, recovering deleted text follows
|
||
the rule of LIFO (last in, first out). The last entry of deleted text
|
||
will be the first one recovered and the first entry of deleted text will
|
||
be the last one recovered.
|
||
|
||
Here are some additional items of which to be aware regarding the Kill
|
||
Buffer and its uses.
|
||
|
||
* A separate Kill Buffer is maintained for each file loaded into the
|
||
editor. The Kill Buffer for each file exists only as long as the file
|
||
is loaded.
|
||
|
||
* The default size of the Kill Buffer is 30 entries. This may be
|
||
changed using the configuration program. Refer to the "General
|
||
Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
* The text deleted using the DelLine, DelRtWord, and DelToEol commands
|
||
will take up one entry in the Kill Buffer each time the commands are
|
||
executed. The text deleted using the DeleteBlock command will take up
|
||
as many entries as there are lines in the Block.
|
||
|
||
It is important to note that regardless of how large the Kill Buffer
|
||
is configured to be, it may be possible to mark and delete a Block in
|
||
the file which is larger than the buffer. If this situation arises,
|
||
the editor will save the deleted text in the Kill Buffer from the
|
||
bottom up. For example, if a marked Block is 200 lines long and five
|
||
lines too large for the Kill Buffer, then the top five lines of the
|
||
Block will not be loaded into the Kill Buffer.
|
||
|
||
* When issuing the UnKill command to recover deleted text, deleted lines
|
||
will be inserted immediately before the current cursor line, and
|
||
deleted words will be inserted immediately before the current cursor
|
||
position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MACROS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides a helpful facility for creating macros, allowing you
|
||
to simplify and automate editing tasks and to more fully customize the
|
||
editor. Macros can be created as simple Keyboard Macros, by having the
|
||
editor record a series of keystrokes as they are entered from the
|
||
keyboard. More versatile macros can be created by assigning a series of
|
||
editing and macro commands to specific keys within the editor's Keyboard
|
||
Definition file (QCONFIG.DAT). To create even more complex macros, QMac
|
||
(the external macro facility) can be used. (QMac is included in the
|
||
registered version.)
|
||
|
||
For more information about creating and using macros, refer to the file
|
||
MACRO.DOC.
|
||
|
||
|
||
|
||
PRINTING
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to print either your entire current file or a
|
||
portion of the current file.
|
||
|
||
To print the entire current file, enter the PrintAll <Alt P><A> command.
|
||
The entire current file is printed.
|
||
|
||
To print a portion of the current file, first mark the portion of the
|
||
file to be printed using the Block-marking commands. (Refer to the
|
||
"Block Commands" section in this chapter.) Next, enter the PrintBlock
|
||
<Alt P><B> command. Only the marked Block portion of the file is
|
||
printed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Print Formatting
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor contains various commands to make printing easier and more
|
||
useful. There are commands to set the left margin, the top margin, and
|
||
the bottom margin; to specify the number of lines per page; to indicate
|
||
the output destination; to select single-, double-, or triple-spacing;
|
||
and to indicate whether you want to print line numbers.
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintLeftMargin <Alt P><L> or <Esc><P><L>
|
||
This command specifies the number of blank spaces to be used as a left
|
||
margin. Valid values are zero to 200.
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintPageSize <Alt P><P> or <Esc><P><P>
|
||
This command specifies the number of lines to be printed on each page.
|
||
Valid values are zero to 200. A value of zero instructs the editor to
|
||
print continuously without page breaks.
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintTopMargin <Alt P><T> or <Esc><P><T>
|
||
This command specifies the number of lines printed at the top of each
|
||
page before the text is printed. Valid values are zero to 200. If
|
||
the print page size is zero, the editor treats the document as one
|
||
page and the top margin is ignored for all pages except the first
|
||
printed page.
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintBotMargin <Alt P><O> or <Esc><P><O>
|
||
This command specifies the number of lines left blank at the bottom of
|
||
each page. Valid values are zero to 200. If the print page size is
|
||
zero, this command has no effect.
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintDevice <Alt P><D> or <Esc><P><D>
|
||
This command identifies the print output destination. Choices are
|
||
PRN, LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, or any valid DOS filename (for printing to
|
||
disk).
|
||
|
||
* SetPrintLineSpacing <Alt P><S> or <Esc><P><S>
|
||
This command indicates the number of lines to advance for each new
|
||
line of text to be printed. Valid values are 1 to 200. A value of 1
|
||
signifies single-spaced output, 2 signifies double-spaced output, etc.
|
||
|
||
* TogglePrintLineNumbers <Alt P><N> or <Esc><P><N>
|
||
This command determines whether line numbers are printed. Set this
|
||
option ON to have file line numbers printed at the beginning of each
|
||
line; set this option OFF if you do not want line numbers added to the
|
||
print output.
|
||
|
||
* TogglePrintPause <Alt P><U> or <Esc><P><U>
|
||
This command determines whether the editor suspends printing between
|
||
pages.
|
||
|
||
To have the editor pause after each page is sent to the printer, set
|
||
this option ON. (For this option to operate effectively, the print
|
||
page size must be set to an appropriate value greater than 0. Refer
|
||
to SetPrintPageSize in this section.) The editor then requires a
|
||
keypress after every page is printed before continuing. This allows
|
||
you to manually feed paper to the printer, one sheet at a time.
|
||
|
||
Set this option OFF for the editor to automatically send each
|
||
subsequent page to the printer without pausing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Formfeeds
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor automatically sends a formfeed character (ASCII 12) to the
|
||
printer between each printed page. A page is determined according to
|
||
the value of SetPrintPageSize (refer to the previous section).
|
||
|
||
By default, the editor also sends a formfeed character when printing is
|
||
complete (after the last printed page). You can configure the editor so
|
||
that it does not send a final formfeed. To change the default behavior,
|
||
set the configuration option "Add formfeed after printing" to <N>.
|
||
(Refer to the "Printer Options" section of Chapter 2.) You can also
|
||
change this option interactively for the current session only, with the
|
||
following command:
|
||
|
||
* TogglePrintAddFF <Alt P><R> or <Esc><P><R>
|
||
This command determines whether the editor sends a formfeed character
|
||
when printing is complete (after the last printed page).
|
||
|
||
To have the editor send a final formfeed character to the printer, set
|
||
this option ON. Set this option OFF to prevent the editor from
|
||
automatically sending a final formfeed character.
|
||
|
||
|
||
At times you may find it desirable to insert formfeed characters
|
||
directly into your text. For example, you want the page size for your
|
||
text to be 55 lines, which you have set using the SetPrintPageSize
|
||
command, but there is a 15-line table in the text that should appear on
|
||
a page by itself. To accomplish this, simply insert formfeed characters
|
||
immediately before and after the table.
|
||
|
||
To insert a formfeed character in the text, enter the Literal <Ctrl P>
|
||
command followed by a formfeed <Ctrl L> character. Alternatively, you
|
||
can insert a formfeed character by holding down the <Alt> key and typing
|
||
"12" on the alternate numeric keypad. (You can also use the built-in
|
||
ASCII-chart feature to insert a formfeed character. Refer to the
|
||
AsciiChart command in the section "Adding Text" of this chapter.) If
|
||
you need to insert formfeed characters into your text repeatedly, you
|
||
may want to use a macro. An example of a macro to insert formfeed
|
||
characters can be found in the "Example of a Keyboard Macro" in the file
|
||
MACRO.DOC.
|
||
|
||
It is also possible, from within the editor, to send a formfeed
|
||
character directly to the printer, causing the printer to eject a page.
|
||
To do this, simply execute the PrintEject <Alt P><F> command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE SHELL AND DOS COMMANDS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
(For the following discussion, "Dos" is an editor command, while "DOS"
|
||
refers to the computer's operating system.)
|
||
|
||
Two very helpful commands allow you to interact with DOS from within the
|
||
editor. The commands, Shell and Dos, allow you to perform most
|
||
functions that you would normally execute from the DOS command line,
|
||
then return you to your original position in the editor.
|
||
|
||
The editor also has an option which frees up memory when executing the
|
||
Shell and Dos commands. For details, see "Swapping, [JR] Shell
|
||
Indicator" later in this section.
|
||
|
||
* Shell <F9>
|
||
This command should be used when executing multiple DOS commands. Upon
|
||
executing the Shell command, control is passed to DOS. The DOS prompt
|
||
appears on the screen, just as if no other programs were running. You
|
||
may now enter most DOS commands. (Some exceptions are noted below.)
|
||
Once you have entered all the desired DOS commands, simply type "exit"
|
||
and press <Enter>, and control passes back to the editor. You are
|
||
then positioned in the file exactly where you were when the Shell
|
||
command was executed.
|
||
|
||
* Dos <Alt F9>
|
||
This command should be used when executing a single DOS command. Upon
|
||
executing this command, the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Execute what: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
You may now enter almost any DOS command. (Some exceptions are noted
|
||
below.) Once the DOS command has completed, pressing any key causes
|
||
control to pass back to the editor.
|
||
|
||
You should not execute any TSR programs (programs that terminate but
|
||
remain resident in your computer) from the Shell or Dos commands. For
|
||
example, the DOS PRINT and GRAPHICS commands are TSR programs.
|
||
|
||
If you mistakenly execute a TSR program from the Shell or Dos command,
|
||
the computer's memory allocation scheme will probably become fragmented,
|
||
and as a result, the editor's available memory may become severely
|
||
limited. You should save your files, terminate the editor, and then
|
||
reboot the computer.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Swapping, [JR] Shell Indicator
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The Dos and Shell commands can optionally swap the editor out to disk or
|
||
expanded memory leaving only a 2K kernel in memory. This allows much
|
||
more memory for running memory-hungry programs (such as compilers) from
|
||
within the editor. You can set this option by default using the
|
||
configuration program (Advanced Options), or you can toggle it ON and
|
||
OFF using the ToggleSwap command.
|
||
|
||
While in a shell with swapping ON, the editor will maintain a file with
|
||
a ".SWP" file extension in your root directory. It is very important
|
||
that you do not delete this file while in the shell.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Once in the shell, the editor will optionally append "[JR]" to the DOS
|
||
prompt string, provided that:
|
||
|
||
1. You have defined the prompt environment variable.
|
||
|
||
2. There is enough space left in the environment.
|
||
|
||
3. You have set the "Change DOS PROMPT during a Shell" option to <Y> via
|
||
the configuration program. (For more information, refer to the
|
||
"Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
If you have NOT defined the prompt environment variable, then we suggest
|
||
you do so. It is helpful with DOS command-line operations in general.
|
||
A suggested prompt is (this should go in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file):
|
||
|
||
set prompt=$p $t $g
|
||
|
||
If you do have a prompt string defined, but you do not get the "[JR]"
|
||
prompt in the editor's shell, add the following to your AUTOEXEC.BAT:
|
||
|
||
set x=x
|
||
|
||
|
||
WORD-PROCESSING COMMANDS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor has all the features you need to do basic word processing.
|
||
In addition to the commands which enable you to view and edit your text
|
||
(discussed in previous sections), the editor provides word-wrapping,
|
||
paragraph-reformatting capabilities, and a line-centering command.
|
||
|
||
The editor also contains commands for changing case and for filling a
|
||
Block. Refer to the sections in this chapter on "Changing Case" and
|
||
"Manipulating Blocks Directly," respectively, for more information on
|
||
these two functions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* The Right Margin
|
||
To benefit from the word-wrap and paragraph-reformatting features of
|
||
the editor, an appropriate right margin must first be set. The
|
||
default setting is column 72. This may be changed using the
|
||
configuration program. (Refer to the "General Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2 for instructions on how to change the right margin setting.)
|
||
The value of the right margin is used each time the editor is
|
||
initiated.
|
||
|
||
The editor provides the ability to change the right margin setting
|
||
temporarily while the editor is running without affecting the
|
||
permanent setting. To change the right margin setting temporarily,
|
||
execute the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> command. The editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Right margin [1..2032]: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the desired column number for the right margin. The new setting
|
||
is in effect until the SetRmargin command is executed again or the
|
||
next time the editor is initiated. WordWrap mode (see below) is
|
||
automatically switched ON whenever the right margin is set using this
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
* WordWrap
|
||
WordWrap is an editing mode which can be switched ON and OFF using the
|
||
ToggleWordwrap <Ctrl O W> command. When switched ON, this mode causes
|
||
the cursor to advance automatically to the next line as text is
|
||
entered.
|
||
|
||
The cursor advances to the next line based on the right margin, which
|
||
is set using the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> command (see above). Once the
|
||
cursor reaches the right margin and a non-blank character is typed,
|
||
the cursor, along with the word (that is, any continuous string of
|
||
non-blank characters) currently being typed, will be advanced to the
|
||
next line.
|
||
|
||
The cursor does not advance to the next line if the current line does
|
||
not contain at least one space.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Paragraph Reformatting
|
||
The WrapPara <Alt B> command reformats text from the current cursor
|
||
position to the next blank line or the end of the file.
|
||
|
||
The right-hand side of the text is reformatted based on the right
|
||
margin. The right margin is set using the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R>
|
||
command (see above).
|
||
|
||
The left-hand side of the text is reformatted based on AutoIndent
|
||
mode. If AutoIndent mode is switched OFF, the left margin is column
|
||
one. If AutoIndent mode is switched ON, the first non-blank character
|
||
on the line immediately AFTER the cursor line is used for the left
|
||
margin. Using the line AFTER the cursor line allows for special
|
||
indentation for the first line of a paragraph. (For more information
|
||
on AutoIndent mode, refer to the "Modes" section of this chapter.)
|
||
|
||
* CenterLine <Ctrl O T>
|
||
Centers the current cursor line based on column 1 and the right
|
||
margin. Use the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> command to change the right
|
||
margin (see above).
|
||
|
||
With the cursor inside of a line Block, you can execute this command
|
||
to center several lines at once. With the cursor inside of a column
|
||
Block, you can center lines based on the left and right Block
|
||
boundaries.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MODES
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor uses modes to affect its operation. In general, an editor
|
||
mode is a state during which certain commands or keystrokes behave
|
||
differently. Following is an explanation of various editor modes.
|
||
|
||
* Insert mode
|
||
Insert mode can be switched ON and OFF by pressing the <Ins> key. When
|
||
Insert mode is ON, an "I" appears on the StatusLine. The following
|
||
table describes the commands and keystrokes which are affected by
|
||
Insert mode.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Command/
|
||
Keystroke Insert ON Insert OFF
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Characters, Shifts text to right Overwrites existing
|
||
Space of cursor, one column text.
|
||
to the right.
|
||
|
||
Backspace Deletes character/word Deletes character/word
|
||
to left of cursor. Text to left of cursor. Text
|
||
to right of cursor to right of cursor does
|
||
shifts left one column. not shift.
|
||
|
||
Return Splits line at cursor Does not split line.
|
||
position. Cursor moves Cursor moves to next
|
||
to next line. line.
|
||
|
||
TabLt, Tabs cursor and shifts Tabs cursor only.
|
||
TabRt text same number of
|
||
positions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* CUA-Style Block Marking mode
|
||
|
||
This mode enables CUA-style Block marking, using the shifted cursor
|
||
keys. CUA-Style Block Marking mode can be switched ON and OFF using
|
||
the ToggleCUAMarking command. You can also set this mode as the
|
||
default mode by setting the configuration option "Use CUA-style (shift
|
||
cursor) block marking" to <Y>. (Refer to the "Advanced Options"
|
||
section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
When switched ON, this mode forces the shifted cursor keys to mark
|
||
non-inclusive character Blocks. The "CUA-Style Block Marking" section
|
||
of this chapter provides additional information about this mode.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* AutoIndent mode
|
||
AutoIndent mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleIndent
|
||
<Ctrl Q I> command. This mode, when ON, positions the cursor at the
|
||
current left margin (This is not the same as the print left margin.)
|
||
whenever the <Enter> key is pressed. The current left margin is
|
||
determined by the first non-blank character on the immediately
|
||
preceding line. When AutoIndent mode is ON, an "A" appears on the
|
||
StatusLine. The following table describes the commands and keystrokes
|
||
which are affected by AutoIndent mode.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Command/
|
||
Keystroke AutoIndent ON AutoIndent OFF
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
Return Cursor positioned below Cursor positioned at
|
||
first non-blank character column one.
|
||
of previous line.
|
||
|
||
WrapPara When reformatting, the left A left margin of zero is
|
||
margin is determined from used when reformatting.
|
||
the first non-blank
|
||
character on the line
|
||
immediately following the
|
||
cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* C mode
|
||
This mode is specifically for "C" language programming. It is
|
||
switched ON and OFF using the configuration program. (Refer to the
|
||
"General Options" section of Chapter 2 for information on switching C
|
||
mode ON and OFF.) C mode is only in effect when AutoIndent mode is
|
||
also ON.
|
||
|
||
C mode, when switched ON, affects files with a ".c", ".cpp", ".cxx",
|
||
".h", ".hpp", or ".hxx", file extension. When the current cursor line
|
||
contains a "{" and the <Enter> key is pressed, the editor issues a
|
||
normal Return followed by a TabRt command. Additionally, when a "}"
|
||
character is entered, the editor first issues a TabLt command and then
|
||
enters the "}" character.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* WordWrap mode
|
||
WordWrap mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleWordwrap
|
||
<Ctrl O W> command. When switched ON, this mode causes the cursor to
|
||
advance to the next line automatically as text is entered.
|
||
|
||
The cursor advances to the next line based on the right margin, which
|
||
is set using the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> command. Once the cursor
|
||
reaches the right margin and a non-blank character is typed, the
|
||
cursor, along with the word (i.e., any continuous string of non-blank
|
||
characters) currently being typed, is advanced to the next line.
|
||
|
||
The cursor does not advance to the next line if the current line does
|
||
not contain at least one space. When WordWrap mode is ON, a "W"
|
||
appears on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* BackUp mode
|
||
BackUp mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleBakups <Esc><O><B>
|
||
command. When BackUp Mode is switched ON, the editor creates a backup
|
||
copy (using the .bak file extension) for any file that is edited and
|
||
saved. The backup copy of the file is an image of the file before it
|
||
was last edited and saved. When BackUp mode is OFF, no backup files
|
||
are created.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* MacroRecord mode
|
||
MacroRecord mode is switched ON and OFF using the MacroRecord <Ctrl M>
|
||
command. This mode, when ON, records and assigns a series of commands
|
||
and keystrokes to a designated key (or scrap area). This creates a
|
||
Keyboard Macro. For a complete explanation of macros and their use,
|
||
refer to the file MACRO.DOC. When MacroRecord mode is ON, an "R"
|
||
appears on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* EnterMatching mode
|
||
EnterMatching mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleEnterMatching
|
||
<Esc><O><E> command. If switched ON, the editor automatically inserts
|
||
into the text a corresponding ), ], }, or " character each time a (, [,
|
||
{, or " character, respectively, is entered.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Box Drawing mode
|
||
Box Drawing mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleBoxDraw <Shift
|
||
F1> command. If switched ON, the cursor movement keys (up, down,
|
||
right, left) can be used to "draw" lines in the text. This can be
|
||
very useful for creating charts and tables. The ToggleBoxType command
|
||
allows you to select different line drawing styles. When Box Drawing
|
||
mode is ON, a "B" appears on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Synchronized Scrolling mode
|
||
Synchronized Scrolling mode is switched ON and OFF using the
|
||
ToggleSyncScroll <Ctrl O Y> command. If switched ON, and there are
|
||
multiple windows on the screen, the editor simultaneously performs
|
||
cursor movement and scrolling activity in all other windows as you
|
||
move the cursor or scroll the text in the current window. When
|
||
Synchronized Scrolling mode is ON, an "S" appears on the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
The "Synchronized Scrolling in Windows" section of this chapter
|
||
provides additional information about this mode.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Fixed Tabs mode
|
||
Fixed Tabs mode is selected using the SetTabType <Esc><O><Y> command.
|
||
If selected, the TabRt and TabLt commands move the cursor to the next
|
||
(or previous) tabstop as defined by the value of the cursor tab width
|
||
(set by the SetCtabwidth <Esc><O><C> command).
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Smart Tabs mode
|
||
Smart Tabs mode is selected using the SetTabType <Esc><O><Y> command.
|
||
If selected, the TabRt and TabLt commands place the cursor beneath the
|
||
first character of the next (or previous) word on the first nonblank
|
||
line preceding the current cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Variable Tabs mode
|
||
Variable Tabs mode is selected using the SetTabType <Esc><O><Y>
|
||
command. If selected, the TabRt and TabLt commands move the cursor to
|
||
the next (or previous) tabstop as defined by the variable tab stops
|
||
(set by the SetVarTabStops <Esc><O><V> command).
|
||
|
||
Note that all of the supported tab modes may be set via the Tab type
|
||
menu (<Esc><O><Y>).
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Physical Tab Expansion mode
|
||
Physical Tab Expansion mode is switched ON and OFF using the
|
||
ToggleTabsExpand <Alt V> command. If switched ON, physical tab
|
||
characters (ASCII 9) found in a file are expanded into spaces
|
||
according to the Physical Tab Width set in the configuration program.
|
||
(Refer to the "Tab Settings" section of Chapter 2.) If switched OFF,
|
||
physical tabs are displayed on the screen and a physical tab character
|
||
is placed in the text each time the TabRt command is executed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ In general, Physical Tab Expansion mode should always be ³
|
||
³ set ON. You would only want to set it OFF if you are ³
|
||
³ editing binary or data files that contain or require ³
|
||
³ physical tabs. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Tabs Out mode
|
||
Tabs Out mode is switched ON and OFF using the ToggleTabsOut <Alt I>
|
||
command. If switched ON, continuous spaces in a line of text are
|
||
replaced with physical tabs (ASCII 9) according to the Physical Tab
|
||
Width set in the configuration program. (Refer to the "Tab Settings"
|
||
section of Chapter 2.) Spaces falling between single or double quotes
|
||
are not replaced.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER 2. CUSTOMIZING THE EDITOR
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides a configuration capability that allows you to
|
||
customize the editor to suit your individual preferences. There are a
|
||
wide range of options which may be customized, including key
|
||
assignments, colors, tab settings, and printer options.
|
||
|
||
Of course, customizing the editor is not a requirement. If you like the
|
||
editor exactly the way it is, it is not necessary to use the
|
||
configuration program.
|
||
|
||
The configuration program is QCONFIG.EXE and is included on the
|
||
distribution diskette, along with the other editor files. The
|
||
configuration program customizes the editor by actually modifying the
|
||
editor program itself - Q.EXE.
|
||
|
||
|
||
INITIATING THE CONFIGURATION PROGRAM
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
To initiate the configuration program, type "qconfig" from the DOS
|
||
command line, and press <Enter>. The program displays a prompt to
|
||
request the name of the editor program to customize. The following
|
||
prompt is issued by the configuration program:
|
||
|
||
Enter program name to config, <CR> for Q.EXE :
|
||
|
||
|
||
Simply press <Enter>, unless you have previously renamed the editor, or
|
||
if the editor is located in another directory.
|
||
|
||
If you have renamed the editor, enter the appropriate filename and press
|
||
<Enter>. If it is located in another directory, enter the full pathname
|
||
and press <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
If the file to be customized could not be located on disk, the error
|
||
message "File not found" is displayed. Check the editor's filename
|
||
and/or path for accuracy.
|
||
|
||
If the version numbers of the editor and the configuration program are
|
||
not the same, the error message "Configuration area not found" is
|
||
displayed. Try reloading the editor software from the distribution disk
|
||
(in particular, Q.EXE and QCONFIG.EXE).
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE CONFIGURATION MENU
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The configuration program displays the following menu from which to
|
||
select the desired functions for customization.
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Configuration choices. ³
|
||
³ Choose One of the Following by pressing the indicated Key: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Advanced options ³
|
||
³ Colors/screen ³
|
||
³ General options ³
|
||
³ Help install ³
|
||
³ Keys ³
|
||
³ Printer options ³
|
||
³ Quit ³
|
||
³ Save changes and quit ³
|
||
³ Tab settings ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Following is a brief explanation of these menu items. They are
|
||
discussed in detail later in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
* Advanced options
|
||
Contains a variety of configurable options, including those related
|
||
to video display, DOS memory, editor menus, and the mouse.
|
||
|
||
* Colors/screen
|
||
Allows you to change colors of various display items and to specify
|
||
numerous other editing display options.
|
||
|
||
* General options
|
||
A miscellaneous category of options.
|
||
|
||
* Help install
|
||
Allows you to install your own Help Screen.
|
||
|
||
* Keys
|
||
Allows you to reassign editor commands to different keys.
|
||
|
||
* Printer options
|
||
Allows you to set options for printing text, such as page size.
|
||
|
||
* Quit
|
||
Terminates the program. You are first prompted to save or not save
|
||
changes.
|
||
|
||
* Save changes and quit
|
||
Terminates the program, unconditionally saving your changes.
|
||
|
||
* Tab settings
|
||
Allows you to set various tab-related options, including the
|
||
physical and cursor tab widths.
|
||
|
||
|
||
To make a selection from the menu, type the first letter of the desired
|
||
menu item. You are prompted for a response to each option within the
|
||
category. Each configuration option is displayed along with its current
|
||
value. (The Keys and Help install categories, however, work a little
|
||
differently and simply request a filename.)
|
||
|
||
For each option displayed, you may enter a new value. If you do not
|
||
wish to change the current value, simply press <Enter>. After you have
|
||
reviewed all options in a category, you are returned to the main
|
||
configuration menu where you can select another category.
|
||
|
||
Once you have completed customizing, you may save all the changes you
|
||
have made either by simply typing "S" at the main menu prompt; or by
|
||
typing "Q" at the main menu prompt, and then typing "Y" at the prompt,
|
||
"Save Changes (Y/N)?". Your changes are made permanent (that is,
|
||
effective the next time you execute the editor) by writing them to the
|
||
editor program itself (Q.EXE or QMR.EXE). The configuration program
|
||
then terminates.
|
||
|
||
If you decide that you do not want to save your changes, type "Q" at the
|
||
main menu prompt, then type "N" at the prompt, "Save Changes (Y/N)?". No
|
||
changes are saved, and the configuration program terminates.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ADVANCED OPTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section contains a list of the Advanced Options which can be
|
||
customized using the configuration program. The configuration program
|
||
prompt message, the default value, and a description are given for each
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
* Test for presence of enhanced keyboard (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
If your system has an enhanced (101-key) keyboard, set this option
|
||
to <Y> for the editor to recognize the additional keys such as F11,
|
||
F12, and the grey cursor keys.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ Many TSRs, including mouse drivers, do not properly ³
|
||
³ recognize the enhanced keyboard. If you are using a TSR ³
|
||
³ and it is not working with the editor, try setting this ³
|
||
³ option to <N>. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Swap to Expanded memory or DISK on the Dos and Shell commands (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Select <Y> if you want the editor to swap itself out of DOS memory
|
||
and to expanded memory or disk whenever the Dos or Shell commands
|
||
are executed. This will leave a small 2K editor kernel in DOS
|
||
memory, freeing up the rest of DOS memory for running other
|
||
applications, such as compilers or spreadsheets, out of the Dos or
|
||
Shell commands.
|
||
|
||
* Drive and path for swapping (*=default-drive) [C:\] :
|
||
If you selected <Y> for the previous option, then specify here the
|
||
disk drive and path to be used for swapping. Enter an asterisk
|
||
("*") if you want the editor to default to your current drive for
|
||
swapping.
|
||
|
||
* Should the editor change the cursor size (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
By default, the editor uses a small cursor when Insert mode is OFF,
|
||
and a medium cursor when Insert mode is ON. Select <N> if you do
|
||
not want the editor to change the cursor size.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want a large flashing cursor (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
If you want to use a large flashing block cursor, set this option to
|
||
<Y>. This option is great for laptop users.
|
||
|
||
* Size of cursor in Insert mode [0..7] [4] :
|
||
Determines the size of the cursor when Insert mode is ON. A value
|
||
of 0 indicates that no cursor indication is to be displayed. Values
|
||
1 to 7 indicate increasingly larger flashing cursor sizes.
|
||
|
||
* Size of cursor in overwrite mode [0..7] [1] :
|
||
Determines the size of the cursor when overwrite mode is ON. A
|
||
value of 0 indicates that no cursor indication is to be displayed.
|
||
Values 1 to 7 indicate increasingly larger flashing cursor sizes.
|
||
|
||
* Get num rows on screen from BIOS data area (100% IBM PC only)(Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
FOR NON EGA/VGA SYSTEMS ONLY. Set this option to <Y> if you want
|
||
the editor to automatically detect the number of rows on your
|
||
screen.
|
||
|
||
Setting this option to <Y>, to automatically detect the number of
|
||
rows on your screen, only works if you have an IBM PC-AT or 100%
|
||
compatible. For example, setting this option to <Y> does NOT work
|
||
on AT&T 6300s.
|
||
|
||
* Number of rows on screen (NOT NEEDED with EGA/VGA) [25..255] [25] :
|
||
FOR NON EGA/VGA SYSTEMS ONLY. If you set the previous option to
|
||
<N>, then you must provide the number of rows on your screen here.
|
||
|
||
You should set this option to 25 unless you have a special card and
|
||
monitor (such as a Genius Video System) that allow you to display
|
||
more than 25 rows.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the Return command to split lines in Insert mode (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Normally, the Return command splits the current line at the cursor
|
||
when executed with Insert mode ON. This means that the portion of
|
||
the line following the cursor is inserted on a new line. If Insert
|
||
mode is OFF, the Return command simply places the cursor at the
|
||
beginning of the next line.
|
||
|
||
If you select <N> for this option, the Return command always acts as
|
||
if Insert mode is OFF. Return moves the cursor to the beginning of
|
||
the next line with no effect on the text.
|
||
|
||
* Should Cut and Copy use current line if no block marked (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
If you enter <Y> for this option, the current cursor line is used
|
||
when you execute the Cut or Copy command and no Block is marked in
|
||
the current file.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the Escape command to invoke the menus (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
By default, the Escape command displays the pull-down menu, when
|
||
executed outside of the menu or any editor prompts. If you do NOT
|
||
want the Escape command to do this, select <N> for this option.
|
||
|
||
* Should the editor restore the starting drive/dir on program exit (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want to return to the original DOS
|
||
drive and directory on program exit regardless of which drives and
|
||
directories you have accessed with the editor's directory picker or
|
||
the Dos or Shell commands.
|
||
|
||
* Should the editor change the DOS PROMPT during a shell (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want the following to be appended to
|
||
the DOS prompt during an editor Shell: [JR].
|
||
|
||
* Should TabRt/TabLt be allowed to shift an entire block (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want the TabRt and TabLt commands to
|
||
shift entire marked Blocks when the cursor is within the marked
|
||
Block and Insert mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
* Date format: 1=MM-DD-YY, 2=DD-MM-YY, 3=YY-MM-DD [1] :
|
||
Determines the date format used by the InsertDate command. The date
|
||
string consists of a three-character abbreviation for the day of the
|
||
week, followed by the numerical date of the month. The order of the
|
||
elements of the date of the month can be selected from three
|
||
options: select <1> for month, followed by day of the month,
|
||
followed by 2-digit year; select <2> for day of the month, followed
|
||
by month, followed by 2-digit year; select <3> for 2-digit year,
|
||
followed by month, followed by day of the month.
|
||
|
||
* Character to use to separate the elements of the date [-] :
|
||
Determines the separator character used by the InsertDate command.
|
||
Select the character to be used to separate the day, month, and year
|
||
elements of the date.
|
||
|
||
* Time format: 1=24-hour, 2=12-hour [1] :
|
||
Determines the time format used by the InsertTime command. Select
|
||
<1> for 24-hour time format; select <2> for 12-hour time format.
|
||
|
||
* Character to use to separate the elements of the time [:] :
|
||
Determines the separator character used by the InsertTime command.
|
||
Select the character to be used to separate the hours and minutes
|
||
(and seconds for 24-hour format) elements of the time.
|
||
|
||
* Full path to supplemental files [] :
|
||
Identifies the directory where the editor's supplemental files are
|
||
stored. These supplemental files are: the files used by the
|
||
spelling checker (in the registered version); and any loadable
|
||
macro files (that is, Keyboard Macros and macros created with QMac).
|
||
|
||
If you are using DOS 3 or above and you store all supplemental files
|
||
in the same directory as the editor, you do not need to set this
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
* Enable mouse processing (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor recognizes use of a mouse for editing
|
||
operations. If this option is set to <Y>, and a mouse driver is
|
||
loaded, the mouse will be active in the editor. Set this option to
|
||
<N> to disable mouse operation within the editor.
|
||
|
||
* Left-handed mouse (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the mouse operates as a left-handed mouse. Set
|
||
this option to <Y> to swap the functions of the outside buttons on
|
||
the mouse for use with your left hand. Set this option to <N> for
|
||
standard operation of the mouse buttons.
|
||
|
||
* Mouse hold time (in 1/18th sec) [1..36] [9] :
|
||
Indicates the amount of time a mouse button must be held down to
|
||
distinguish between the mouse button being clicked (pressed and
|
||
immediately released) versus being pressed and held.
|
||
|
||
When a mouse button is clicked, a command executed from a mouse
|
||
scrollbar is executed one time only. When a mouse button is pressed
|
||
and held, the command is executed repeatedly until the mouse button
|
||
is released. (See "Mouse repeat-delay factor" below.) Only the
|
||
scrolling operations are repeatable.
|
||
|
||
To select the amount of time that you must hold down the mouse
|
||
button before the editor begins repeating a mouse-executed command,
|
||
set this option to the desired value, from 1 through 36. The time
|
||
is measured in terms of machine timer ticks, in 1/18-second
|
||
increments.
|
||
|
||
For example: A value of 9 means that the mouse button is considered
|
||
clicked if pressed and released within 1/2 second; otherwise, if the
|
||
mouse button is pressed and held for longer than 1/2 second, the
|
||
editor begins repeating the selected command.
|
||
|
||
* Mouse repeat-delay factor [0..32767] [600] :
|
||
Indicates the relative amount of time the editor is to wait between
|
||
repetitions of a command when a mouse button is pressed and held.
|
||
(See "Mouse hold time" above.) When a mouse button is pressed and
|
||
held, a command executed from a mouse scrollbar is repeated as long
|
||
as the mouse button is held down.
|
||
|
||
To control the amount of time that the editor delays between each
|
||
repetition of a mouse-executed command, set this option to an
|
||
appropriate value, from 0 through 32767. This option is hardware
|
||
dependent, and is relative to the speed of your particular machine.
|
||
To slow down repetition, increase the value of this option; to speed
|
||
up repetition, decrease the value.
|
||
|
||
* Use CUA-style (shift cursor) block marking (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether CUA-Style Block Marking mode is initially ON or
|
||
OFF each time the editor is executed. If this option is set to <Y>,
|
||
the editor forces the following shifted cursor keys to operate as
|
||
indicated (regardless of the commands asssigned to these keys in
|
||
QCONFIG.DAT):
|
||
|
||
CUA-style Key Block-marking Operation
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
<Shift Cursor Left> Mark/extend Block and move left one character
|
||
<Shift Cursor Right> Mark/extend Block and move right one character
|
||
<Shift Cursor Up> Mark/extend Block and move up one line
|
||
<Shift Cursor Down> Mark/extend Block and move down one line
|
||
<Shift Home> Mark/extend Block and move to beginning of line
|
||
<Shift End> Mark/extend Block and move to end of line
|
||
<Shift PgUp> Mark/extend Block and move up one page
|
||
<Shift PgDn> Mark/extend Block and move down one page
|
||
|
||
Set this option to <N> to have the shifted cursor keys operate
|
||
according to their assignments in QCONFIG.DAT.
|
||
|
||
* Should blocks remain marked after CUA marking (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether a Block marked using the CUA-style marking keys
|
||
(with CUA-Style Block Marking mode ON) will remain marked after you
|
||
type a non-CUA-style Block marking or command key. Set this option
|
||
to <Y> for such Blocks to remain marked. Set this option to <N> if
|
||
you want such Blocks to be automatically unmarked once you type a
|
||
non-CUA-style Block marking or command key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
COLORS/SCREEN OPTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section contains a list of the Screen and Screen Color Options
|
||
which can be customized using the configuration program. The
|
||
configuration program prompt message, the default value, and a
|
||
description are given for each option.
|
||
|
||
* StatusLine position: 'T' for top, 'B' for bottom [T] :
|
||
Indicates whether the StatusLine is to be positioned at the top line
|
||
or the bottom line of the screen.
|
||
|
||
* StatusLine fill character [ ] :
|
||
This character is used to "break up" the information on the editor's
|
||
StatusLine. The default is the space character. For example, if
|
||
the dash character is specified, the StatusLine would look like
|
||
this:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³L 15-- C 15---IAW-BS--411K-----*c:\semware\editor.doc--------³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
* Display hex/decimal values of current character on StatusLine (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Shows the hexadecimal and decimal values of the current character at
|
||
the right-hand edge of the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the display boxed (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Indicates whether the editing screen is to be completely enclosed in
|
||
a box, so that each window on the screen has a border. To fully use
|
||
the mouse capabilities, set this option to <Y>. This is because the
|
||
mouse uses the border area to scroll text and perform many window
|
||
operations.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the original screen restored upon termination (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor is to restore the original screen upon
|
||
exiting the program. Be aware that setting this option to <Y>
|
||
causes the editor to require an additional 4K of memory; however,
|
||
this can be very handy after long editing sessions to see what you
|
||
were doing before you started.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want snow checking (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor should slow down screen updating to
|
||
eliminate "snow" (a sparkling appearance on the screen that results
|
||
from updating the screen too quickly).
|
||
|
||
If this option is set to <Y>, and the editor determines that your
|
||
system has a Color/Graphics Adapter card (CGA), the editor does not
|
||
write to the screen at full speed, in order to avoid "snow". If you
|
||
have a CGA card that does not create snow effects, set this option
|
||
to <N> so that the editor updates the screen as quickly as possible.
|
||
|
||
If you have a VGA, EGA, COMPAQ, ZENITH, or other color adapter that
|
||
allows full speed screen updating without "snow", then set this
|
||
option to <N>.
|
||
|
||
This option has no effect on monochrome and true EGA/VGA cards.
|
||
|
||
* Columns to scroll horizontally for screen lt/rt commands [1..400] [1] :
|
||
Specifies the number of columns that the editor should scroll when
|
||
you execute the ScreenLeft or ScreenRight commands.
|
||
|
||
* Startup video mode: 0=current, 1=25lines, 2=28lines, 3=43/50lines [0] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor sets an initial video mode upon
|
||
startup.
|
||
|
||
0: Use the current video mode
|
||
1: Set the monitor to 25-line mode
|
||
2: Set the monitor to 28-line mode (VGA only)
|
||
3: Set the monitor to 43/50-line mode (EGA = 43, VGA = 50)
|
||
|
||
* Startup attribute set: 0=AutoDetect, 1=Monochrome, 2=Color [0] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor uses color or monochrome attributes
|
||
for the screen display. If you set this option to <0>, the editor
|
||
will automatically detect the monitor type (color or monochrome) and
|
||
use the appropriate attributes.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want to configure the mono attribute set (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Select <Y> if you wish to specify the attributes to use for the
|
||
monochrome attribute set.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want to configure the color attribute set (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Select <Y> if you wish to specify the attributes to use for the
|
||
color attribute set. (This option is skipped if you select <Y> for
|
||
the previous option.)
|
||
|
||
If you select <Y> for either of the previous two options, the following
|
||
color chart and screen display options are presented:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³Attribute chart/guide. [0..127] ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³[ 0][ 1][ 2][ 3][ 4][ 5][ 6][ 7][ 8][ 9][ 10][ 11][ 12][ 13][ 14][ 15]³
|
||
³[ 16][ 17][ 18][ 19][ 20][ 21][ 22][ 23][ 24][ 25][ 26][ 27][ 28][ 29][ 30][ 31]³
|
||
³[ 32][ 33][ 34][ 35][ 36][ 37][ 38][ 39][ 40][ 41][ 42][ 43][ 44][ 45][ 46][ 47]³
|
||
³[ 48][ 49][ 50][ 51][ 52][ 53][ 54][ 55][ 56][ 57][ 58][ 59][ 60][ 61][ 62][ 63]³
|
||
³[ 64][ 65][ 66][ 67][ 68][ 69][ 70][ 71][ 72][ 73][ 74][ 75][ 76][ 77][ 78][ 79]³
|
||
³[ 80][ 81][ 82][ 83][ 84][ 85][ 86][ 87][ 88][ 89][ 90][ 91][ 92][ 93][ 94][ 95]³
|
||
³[ 96][ 97][ 98][ 99][100][101][102][103][104][105][106][107][108][109][110][111]³
|
||
³[112][113][114][115][116][117][118][119][120][121][122][123][124][125][126][127]³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³Select attributes from the chart above. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
The chart above is for use with the following Screen Color Options.
|
||
Enter a number, in response to each option, based on the color in which
|
||
the number appears on the chart.
|
||
|
||
If you have a monochrome screen, many of the values in the chart will
|
||
appear to be the same color. However, you still have the options of
|
||
normal, highlighted, underlined, and reverse video. If you have a color
|
||
monitor, you can take advantage of a wider array of options. (The
|
||
default monochrome setting is shown in the text of each prompt message
|
||
below. The default color setting is shown to the right of the prompt
|
||
message.)
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Blocked Text [112]: Default Color Setting: [120]
|
||
The color used for marked Blocks.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Error msgs [112]: Default Color Setting: [15]
|
||
The color used for warning and error messages.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Text Area [7]: Default Color Setting: [27]
|
||
The color used for normal text (the editing screen).
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for StatusLine [112]: Default Color Setting: [112]
|
||
The color used for the StatusLine.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Cursor Line [15]: Default Color Setting: [30]
|
||
The color used for the cursor line. Reverts to normal when a
|
||
Block is marked.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Messages [15]: Default Color Setting: [15]
|
||
The color used for messages.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Hi-lited items [9]: Default Color Setting: [9]
|
||
The color used for "found" search strings when using the Find and
|
||
FindReplace commands.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for EOF line/indicator [15]: Default Color Setting: [15]
|
||
The color used for the "End of File" line.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Help Screen [112]: Default Color Setting: [112]
|
||
The color used for the Help Screen.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Display Box Border [15]: Default Color Setting: [31]
|
||
The color used for the border around the editor, if the editing
|
||
screen is boxed.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for PopUp windows [15]: Default Color Setting: [112]
|
||
The color used for the border around the pull-down menus and the
|
||
prompt boxes.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Menu items [7]: Default Color Setting: [112]
|
||
The color used for items within sub-menus of the pull-down menu.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Selected Menu items [112]: Default Color Setting: [32]
|
||
The color used for selected items within the pull-down menus.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Menu Quick Letter [15]: Default Color Setting: [116]
|
||
The color used for the highlighted quick-key letter for each item
|
||
listed on the pull-down menus.
|
||
|
||
* Attribute for Selected Menu Quick Letter [15]:
|
||
Default Color Setting: [36]
|
||
The color used for the highlighted quick-key letter for the selected
|
||
item on the pull-down menus.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GENERAL OPTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section contains a list of the General Options which can be
|
||
customized using the configuration program. The configuration program
|
||
prompt message, the default value, and a description are given for each
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the DelCh command to join lines if at EOL (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Affects the behavior of the DelCh command. Set this option to <N>
|
||
if you want the DelCh command to be restricted so that it only works
|
||
on the current line. Set this option to <Y> if you want the DelCh
|
||
command to work across line breaks. This means that if you issue
|
||
DelCh at the end of the line, the following line is joined to the
|
||
end of the cursor line (just as if you had issued a JoinLine
|
||
command).
|
||
|
||
* Do you want PQuit, Exit, and File to return to EditFile prompt (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
If only 1 file is being edited, the editor can either terminate or
|
||
ask for another file to edit whenever the PQuit, Exit, or File
|
||
commands are executed. To have the editor terminate, select <N>.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in WordWrap mode (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want WordWrap mode to be ON each time
|
||
the editor is started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the
|
||
"Word-Processing Commands" section of Chapter 1 for more information
|
||
on WordWrap mode.
|
||
|
||
* Default right margin for WordWrap [1..2032] [72] :
|
||
Indicates the default right margin setting to be used each time the
|
||
editor is executed. Set this option to a value from 1 to 2032.
|
||
Refer to the "Word-Processing Commands" section of Chapter 1 for
|
||
more information.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in Insert mode (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want Insert mode to be ON each time
|
||
the editor is started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the
|
||
"Modes" section of Chapter 1 for more information on Insert mode.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in AutoIndent mode (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want AutoIndent mode to be ON each
|
||
time the editor is started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the
|
||
"Modes" section of Chapter 1 for more information on AutoIndent
|
||
mode.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to use sticky AutoIndent (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want autoindenting to search back more
|
||
than one line, if necessary, to find a nonblank line. AutoIndent
|
||
mode must be set ON for this option to work. Refer to the "Modes"
|
||
section of Chapter 1 for more information on AutoIndent mode.
|
||
|
||
* Load wildcarded filespecs from the command line (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Affects the editor's behavior when filenames are specified
|
||
containing wildcard characters (* or ?), from the DOS command line.
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want the editor to load every file
|
||
that matches the wildcarded specification. (For example, if you
|
||
enter "q *.doc", the editor loads all files with the extension
|
||
".doc"). Set this option to <N> if you want the editor to display a
|
||
pick list of all the files which match the wildcarded specification.
|
||
(You can then choose the file you want to edit by using the cursor
|
||
keys to move to the desired file and then pressing <Enter>.)
|
||
|
||
* Load wildcarded filespecs from inside the editor (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Affects the editor's behavior when filenames are specified
|
||
containing wildcard characters (* or ?) within the prompt box for
|
||
the EditFile command. Set this option to <Y> if you want the editor
|
||
to load every file that matches the wildcarded specification. (For
|
||
example, if you enter "*.doc", the editor loads all files with the
|
||
extension ".doc"). Set this option to <N> if you want the editor to
|
||
display a pick list of all the files which match the wildcarded
|
||
specification. (You can then choose the file you want to edit by
|
||
using the cursor keys to move to the desired file and then pressing
|
||
<Enter>.)
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in EnterMatching mode (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want EnterMatching mode to be ON each
|
||
time the editor is started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the
|
||
"Modes" section of Chapter 1 for more information on EnterMatching
|
||
mode.
|
||
|
||
* Use CMODE for .c, .cpp, .cxx, .h, .hpp, and .hxx files (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Set this option to <Y> if you want C mode to be ON each time the
|
||
editor is started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the "Modes"
|
||
section of Chapter 1 for more information on C mode.
|
||
|
||
* Default number of deleted lines to keep per file [0..300] [30] :
|
||
Indicates the number of deleted lines that are saved by the editor,
|
||
and can later be recalled using the UnKill command. For every file
|
||
that is loaded in an editing session, this maximum number of lines
|
||
is available. Enter a value from 0 to 300. (A value of 0 indicates
|
||
that no deleted lines are to be saved.)
|
||
|
||
* Remove trailing blanks from edited lines (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor is to remove trailing blanks from each
|
||
line of text that is edited. Set this option to <Y> if you want
|
||
trailing blanks removed. (For most purposes, this setting is
|
||
preferable, as it generally results in smaller files.) Set this
|
||
option to <N> if you want spaces at the end of lines to be
|
||
preserved.
|
||
|
||
* Terminate files with a Control Z (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor is to add a Control Z to the end of a
|
||
file when it is saved to disk. Set this option to <Y> if you want
|
||
to have a Control Z added to the end of files; otherwise, set this
|
||
option to <N>.
|
||
|
||
MS/PC-DOS versions 2.0 and above do NOT require an end-of-file
|
||
terminator. (The exact size of the file is stored in the
|
||
directory.) However, some programs that were directly translated
|
||
from their CP/M versions still require the Control Z end-of-file
|
||
marker. If you have one of these programs for which you are
|
||
creating text files, you should select <Y> for this option.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want backups of saved files (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor is to create a backup file (an image
|
||
of the file before you did any editing) with the .bak extension each
|
||
time you save a file. Set this option to <Y> to have backups
|
||
created; otherwise, set this option to <N>.
|
||
|
||
* Prompt for filename on open window (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Affects the editor's behavior when the HorizontalWindow command is
|
||
executed. Set this option to <Y> to have the editor prompt for the
|
||
name of the file you want to load into the new window. Set this
|
||
option to <N> to have the editor load the next file in the ring into
|
||
the new window. (If only one file is loaded, another window
|
||
containing the same file is opened.)
|
||
|
||
* Close window when a file is quit (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Affects the editor's behavior when more than one window is open on
|
||
the screen and a command is executed that discards a file from the
|
||
editor. Set this option to <Y> to have the editor close the window
|
||
containing the discarded file. Set this option to <N> to have the
|
||
editor load the next file in the ring into that window.
|
||
|
||
* Display End Of File marker (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor displays an indicator line at the end
|
||
of the file, in the following format:
|
||
|
||
<*** End of File ***>
|
||
|
||
Set this option to <Y> to have the end-of-file indicator line
|
||
displayed; set this option to <N> if you do not want this line
|
||
displayed.
|
||
|
||
* Insert line blocks ABOVE the cursor line (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor is to insert line Blocks above or
|
||
below the cursor line when the Paste, CopyBlock, or MoveBlock
|
||
commands are executed. Set this option to <Y> to have line Blocks
|
||
inserted above the cursor line; set this option to <N> to have line
|
||
Blocks inserted below the cursor line.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want a beep on warning messages and missed searches (Y/N)? [Y]:
|
||
Determines whether the editor sounds the bell on any warning message
|
||
and when there is no match resulting from a Find or FindReplace
|
||
operation. If you want the bell to sound, select <Y>; otherwise,
|
||
select <N>.
|
||
|
||
* Default Find options [IWBG] [I]:
|
||
Indicates the default search options when using the Find command.
|
||
The available default options are: "I" (Ignore case), "W" (Words
|
||
only), "B" (Backwards search), and "G" (Global search). Multiple
|
||
options can be specified.
|
||
|
||
Note that even when these options are not selected as defaults, they
|
||
can still be selected from within the editor when the Find command
|
||
is executed. For more information on the Find command and the
|
||
available Find options, refer to the "Finding Text" section of
|
||
Chapter 1.
|
||
|
||
* Default FindReplace options [IWBNG] []:
|
||
Indicates the default search and replace options when using the
|
||
FindReplace command. The available default options are: "I" (Ignore
|
||
case), "W" (Words only), "B" (Backwards search), "N" (No prompting),
|
||
and "G" (Global search). Multiple options can be specified.
|
||
|
||
Note that even when these options are not selected as defaults, they
|
||
can still be selected from within the editor when the FindReplace
|
||
command is executed. For more information on the FindReplace
|
||
command and the available FindReplace options, refer to the
|
||
"Replacing Text" section of Chapter 1.
|
||
|
||
* Should Find and RepeatFind center the found text (Y/N)? [Y]
|
||
Affects the editor's behavior when the Find, RepeatFind, or
|
||
IncrementalSearch commands are executed. Set this option to <Y> to
|
||
have the line containing the found text centered vertically within
|
||
the current window. Set this option to <N> to have line containing
|
||
the found text positioned on the same row as the current line.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 1 [.c]:
|
||
Specifies the first default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 2 [.pas]:
|
||
Specifies the second default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 3 [.inc]:
|
||
Specifies the third default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 4 [.asm]:
|
||
Specifies the fourth default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 5 [.h]:
|
||
Specifies the fifth default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 6 [.doc]:
|
||
Specifies the sixth default file extension. See explanation below.
|
||
|
||
Six default file extensions are provided to save keystrokes each
|
||
time a filename to edit is entered. These file extensions are used
|
||
when the editor is executed with a filename from the command line or
|
||
when the EditFile command is entered.
|
||
|
||
If the filename entered does not end with a period (and does not
|
||
include the DOS wildcard characters) and that file does NOT exist as
|
||
named, the editor appends the first default file extension to the
|
||
name and tries to load that file. If that file exists, then the
|
||
editor loads it for editing. If it does not exist, the editor
|
||
repeats the process with the other default file extensions. If no
|
||
matching file is found, then the editor creates a new file as
|
||
originally named.
|
||
|
||
For each of the six previous options, enter the desired file
|
||
extension.
|
||
|
||
* Default to case-insensitive sort (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Indicates the default case-sensitivity selection when the Sort
|
||
command is executed. Set this option to <Y> to have the Sort
|
||
command ignore the case of characters; set this option to <N> to
|
||
have the Sort command respect the upper/lower case of characters.
|
||
|
||
* Default to descending-order sort (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Indicates the default sort order when the Sort command is executed.
|
||
Set the option to <Y> to sort in descending order; set this option
|
||
to <N> to sort in ascending order.
|
||
|
||
|
||
THE HELP SCREEN
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to create a customized one-page Help Screen, which
|
||
may be displayed at any time from within the editor by executing the
|
||
QuickHelp <F1> command. This section contains instructions for
|
||
installing your own Help Screen using the configuration program.
|
||
|
||
Of course, you may prefer to use the default Help Screen which is
|
||
already loaded into the editor. In that case no action is required.
|
||
However, if you want to design and use your own Help Screen, simply
|
||
follow these steps:
|
||
|
||
1. Create an 80 x 25 (80 columns by 25 lines) text file (you can use the
|
||
editor to create this file) and list all of the information that
|
||
should appear on the screen when the QuickHelp command is executed.
|
||
We suggest that you list less frequently used commands in this file,
|
||
while leaving out more familiar commands such as cursor movement and
|
||
paging.
|
||
|
||
2. Run QCONFIG and select option <H> from the configuration menu.
|
||
|
||
3. At the prompt, enter the name of the Help file just created.
|
||
|
||
That is all there is to it! Now when you execute QuickHelp from within
|
||
the editor, your customized Help Screen is displayed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
KEYBOARD CONFIGURATION
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor provides the extremely helpful capability of assigning editor
|
||
commands (as well as strings of characters) to almost any key you
|
||
prefer.
|
||
|
||
This allows you to assign frequently-used commands to keys which are
|
||
most convenient for your use, and even to completely reassign commands
|
||
to emulate another text editor or word processor with which you are
|
||
already familiar.
|
||
|
||
By taking a few minutes to review this section, your future text editing
|
||
may become significantly more comfortable as a result of customizing
|
||
your keyboard to suit your individual preferences.
|
||
|
||
|
||
The Keyboard Definition File
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
The editor uses the Keyboard Definition file to customize the keyboard.
|
||
This file contains a list of all the keys to which commands may be
|
||
assigned. Supplied with the editor is a Keyboard Definition file called
|
||
QCONFIG.DAT which contains the default settings for the keyboard. Other
|
||
files are supplied which emulate certain common word processors and
|
||
editors. The READ.ME file contains a list of these other emulations.
|
||
|
||
The Keyboard Definition file consists of a list of configurable keys and
|
||
the commands or macros which are assigned to them. The configurable
|
||
keys are on the left side of the file, with the commands or macros
|
||
assigned to the keys on the right. Blank lines and lines starting with
|
||
an asterisk "*" are ignored. The QCONFIG.DAT file contains a complete
|
||
list of configurable keys.
|
||
|
||
Control keys are specified by a "^". For example:
|
||
|
||
^f1 or ^F1 specifies Control F1
|
||
^c or ^C specifies Control C
|
||
|
||
Alternate keys are specified by a "@". For example:
|
||
|
||
@c or @C specifies Alt C
|
||
@PgUp specifies Alt PgUp
|
||
|
||
Shift keys are specified by a "#". For example:
|
||
|
||
#f1 or #F1 specifies Shift F1
|
||
|
||
The format of a line in the Keyboard Definition file is simply the
|
||
keystroke followed by the command. For example:
|
||
|
||
f1 QuickHelp
|
||
#f5 MakeCtrofScreen
|
||
@f2 InsertLine
|
||
cursorup CursorUp
|
||
^cursorleft WordLeft
|
||
@a DropAnchor
|
||
^a WordLeft
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ The configuration program ignores the case of the key ³
|
||
³ name, and ignores the case of the commands and of any ³
|
||
³ underscores that may be embedded in the commands. This ³
|
||
³ means that PGUP, PgUp, and pgup all refer to the same key, ³
|
||
³ and InsertLine, insert_line, and Insert_Line all refer to ³
|
||
³ the same command. ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
³ Also, the order of the keys does not matter. The ³
|
||
³ configurable keys may be put in any order desired. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
There is also a provision for assigning commands or macros to a
|
||
"two-key". A two-key consists of two distinct keystrokes, such as
|
||
<Ctrl B> immediately followed by <A>. To assign a command or macro to a
|
||
two-key, enter both keystrokes of the two-key in the first column
|
||
(keystroke column) separated by an underline. For example, to assign
|
||
the Exit command to the two-key, <Ctrl F1> <F2>, enter the following
|
||
into the Keyboard Definition file:
|
||
|
||
^f1_f2 Exit
|
||
|
||
(Note that if you assign a command or macro to a single key, and then
|
||
use that same key as the initial key of a two-key sequence, you lose the
|
||
two-key assignment. For example, if you assign a command to <Ctrl B>,
|
||
you would not be able to use a two-key assignment such as <Ctrl B A>.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
To allow you to further customize the editor, multiple commands and/or
|
||
text can be assigned to any configurable key (or two-key). This is
|
||
accomplished through the use of macros. For more information on
|
||
creating macros and assigning them to keys, refer to "Creating Macro
|
||
Programs" in the file MACRO.DOC.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Creating a Keyboard Definition File
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
To customize the keyboard using the default Keyboard Definition file,
|
||
QCONFIG.DAT, no action is required. the editor is distributed with this
|
||
Keyboard Definition file already installed.
|
||
|
||
The following outlines steps to create and install your own Keyboard
|
||
Definition file. (To customize the keyboard using one of the supplied
|
||
word-processor or editor emulation Keyboard Definition files, skip to
|
||
step number 6.)
|
||
|
||
1. Load the file QCONFIG.DAT into the editor. (From the DOS command
|
||
line, type "q qconfig.dat" and press <Enter>).
|
||
|
||
2. Rename the file using the ChangeFilename command <Alt O>.
|
||
|
||
3. Browse through the file using the Cursor Up and Down keys. Notice
|
||
that the left side of the file contains a list of all configurable
|
||
keys. To the right of each key is the command or macro currently
|
||
assigned to the key. Some keys have no commands assigned.
|
||
|
||
4. Change the commands assigned to the keys to suit your particular
|
||
needs. For more information on how to assign keys, refer to the
|
||
previous section, "The Keyboard Definition File."
|
||
|
||
5. Save the file and exit the editor by pressing <Alt X>.
|
||
|
||
6. Run QCONFIG and select option <K> from the menu.
|
||
|
||
7. You will be prompted for the name of the Keyboard Definition file.
|
||
Enter the name of the Keyboard Definition file you wish to load. If
|
||
you are creating your own file, enter the new name chosen in step 2.
|
||
|
||
8. Your key assignments are then incorporated into the editor program,
|
||
Q.EXE, and the configuration menu reappears.
|
||
|
||
9. Press <S> to save your changes and terminate the program.
|
||
|
||
10. Run the editor to insure that your key assignments function as
|
||
desired.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PRINTER OPTIONS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section contains a list of the Printer Options which can be
|
||
customized using the configuration program. The configuration program
|
||
prompt message, the default value, and a description are given for each
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
* Default left margin for printing [0..200] [0]:
|
||
Indicates the number of spaces the editor skips before printing each
|
||
line. If you do not want the editor to skip any spaces at the
|
||
beginning of each line, select zero.
|
||
|
||
* Default page size for printing [0..200] [55]:
|
||
Indicates the number of lines to be printed per page. The editor
|
||
sends a formfeed character to the printer after printing this number
|
||
of lines. If you do NOT want the editor to send formfeed characters
|
||
(for continuous printing), select zero.
|
||
|
||
* Add formfeed after printing (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor sends a formfeed character when
|
||
printing is complete. Select <Y> if you want a formfeed character
|
||
to be sent at the end of the document. (This is helpful for
|
||
correctly lining up the printer in preparation for the next printing
|
||
operation.) Select <N> if you do not want a final formfeed
|
||
character to be sent.
|
||
|
||
* Default top margin for printing [0..200] [0] :
|
||
Indicates the number of lines to be left blank at the top of each
|
||
page during printing.
|
||
|
||
* Default bottom margin for printing [0..200] [0] :
|
||
Indicates the number of lines to be left blank at the bottom of each
|
||
page during printing.
|
||
|
||
* Include line number at beginning of each printed line (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor prints line numbers at the beginning
|
||
of each line. To include line numbers in the printed output, select
|
||
<Y>; otherwise, select <N>.
|
||
|
||
* Default line spacing: 1=single, 2=double, etc... [1..200] [1] :
|
||
Indicates the line spacing to be used when printing.
|
||
|
||
* Should printing pause between pages (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether the editor pauses between each printed page. To
|
||
have the editor pause between pages, select <Y>. (For this option
|
||
to be effective, the print page size must be non-zero.) If you do
|
||
not want the editor to pause between pages, select <N>.
|
||
|
||
* Print Device: 0=PRN, 1=LPT1, 2=LPT2, 3=LPT3 [0] :
|
||
Determines the initial print device.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TAB SETTINGS
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
|
||
This section contains a list of all Tab Setting Options which can be
|
||
customized using the configuration program. The configuration program
|
||
prompt message, the default value, and a description are given for each
|
||
option.
|
||
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in Physical Tab Expansion mode (Y/N)? [Y] :
|
||
Determines whether Physical Tab Expansion mode is initially ON or
|
||
OFF each time the editor is executed. Set this option to <Y> if you
|
||
want Physical Tab Expansion mode to be ON each time the editor is
|
||
started; otherwise, set it to <N>. Refer to the "Modes" section of
|
||
Chapter 1 for more information on Physical Tab Expansion mode.
|
||
|
||
* Do you want the editor to start in Tabs Out mode (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
Determines whether Tabs Out mode is initially ON or OFF each time
|
||
the editor is executed. Set this option to <Y> if you want Tabs Out
|
||
mode to be ON each time the editor is started; otherwise, set it to
|
||
<N>. Refer to the "Modes" section of Chapter 1 for more information
|
||
on Tabs Out mode.
|
||
|
||
* Default physical tab width [1..12] [8]:
|
||
Specifies the tab width that the editor uses when Physical Tab
|
||
Expansion mode or Tabs Out mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
* Default cursor tab width [1..12] [8]:
|
||
Specifies the tab width that the editor uses the TabRt and TabLt
|
||
commands are executed.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 1 for default tabs [.c]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [4]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [4]:
|
||
Specifies the first default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 2 for default tabs [.pas]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [2]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [2]:
|
||
Specifies the second default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 3 for default tabs [.inc]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [2]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [2]:
|
||
Specifies the third default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 4 for default tabs [.asm]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [8]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [8]:
|
||
Specifies the fourth default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 5 for default tabs [.h]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [4]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [4]:
|
||
Specifies the fifth default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
* Default file extension number 6 for default tabs [.doc]:
|
||
Physical tab width for above [8]:
|
||
Cursor tab width for above [8]:
|
||
Specifies the sixth default file extension for default tabs. See
|
||
explanation below.
|
||
|
||
The editor allows you to set default physical and cursor tab widths
|
||
for up to six different file extensions. When a file is loaded that
|
||
matches one of these extensions, the indicated defaults are used.
|
||
Otherwise, the defaults set in the previous two default tab options
|
||
are used.
|
||
|
||
For each of the six options, enter the desired file extension and
|
||
the appropriate physical and cursor tab width values.
|
||
|
||
* Default tab type: 0=Fixed, 1=Smart, 2=Variable [0] :
|
||
Determines the tab type to use each time the editor is executed.
|
||
Select <0>, <1>, or <2>, for Fixed, Smart, or Variable Tabs,
|
||
respectively. Refer to the "Modes" section of Chapter 1 for more
|
||
information on the behavior of each tab type.
|
||
|
||
* Default Variable Tab stop columns:
|
||
[4 8 16 24 40]
|
||
:
|
||
Specifies the columns at which Variable Tab stops are to be set.
|
||
Enter the appropriate column numbers, each separated by a single
|
||
space. The last column at which you can set a Tab is column 255. A
|
||
maximum string of 255 characters can be specified.
|
||
|
||
If you press <Enter> without entering any tabs stops, you are
|
||
prompted with:
|
||
|
||
Delete all Variable Tab stops (Y/N)? [N] :
|
||
|
||
Select <Y> to remove all existing Variable Tab stops. Select <N> to
|
||
leave the tab stops unchanged.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CHAPTER 3. COMMAND REFERENCE
|
||
ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ
|
||
|
||
This chapter contains a description of each of the editor commands.
|
||
Where applicable, the default key assignments are provided.
|
||
Additionally, <Esc> sequences are given for those commands that can be
|
||
accessed through the pull-down menus.
|
||
|
||
To assign commands which do not have a default assignment or to change
|
||
existing key assignments, refer to the "Keyboard Configuration" section
|
||
of Chapter 2 for instructions.
|
||
|
||
|
||
AddLine <F2> or <Esc><E><A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Adds a blank line after the cursor line, placing the cursor on the newly
|
||
created line. The cursor column does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Align
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Aligns the text on the cursor line with the text on the line immediately
|
||
before the cursor line and then positions the cursor on the next line.
|
||
The cursor column does not change. If the cursor is on line one, or the
|
||
previous line is blank, or the cursor line is blank, this command simply
|
||
moves the cursor to the next line.
|
||
|
||
Align searches backward up to 100 lines for a line containing text to
|
||
align with.
|
||
|
||
AltWordSet
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Instructs the editor to recognize an expanded set of characters as
|
||
"word" characters.
|
||
|
||
The default word set contains the following characters: 0 through 9,
|
||
upper and lower case A through Z, and the underline character. The
|
||
AltWordSet command causes additional characters to be considered "word"
|
||
characters. These additional characters are: ! # $ % & ` ' ( ) - . / \
|
||
@ { } ~ : ^
|
||
|
||
The AltWordSet command affects the operation of these commands:
|
||
|
||
DelLtWord MarkWord
|
||
DelRtWord *RepeatFind
|
||
*Find SwapWords
|
||
*FindReplace WordLeft
|
||
isWord WordRight
|
||
|
||
* These commands are affected if the "W" (word) search option is
|
||
selected.
|
||
|
||
The default word set can be re-installed by executing the DefaultWordSet
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
AppendScrBuff <Ctrl B A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Appends the currently marked Block to the end of the named Scratch
|
||
Buffer. The existing contents of the named Scratch Buffer are not lost.
|
||
If the named Scratch Buffer does not exist, a new Scratch Buffer is
|
||
created.
|
||
|
||
|
||
AsciiChart <Esc><O><T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Displays a scrollable ASCII chart on the screen. Press <Enter> to have
|
||
the selected character inserted into the text at the current cursor
|
||
position. Press <Esc> to remove the ASCII chart from the screen without
|
||
placing a character into the text.
|
||
|
||
When the ASCII chart is initially displayed, the cursor bar is located
|
||
on the entry that corresponds to the character at the cursor position in
|
||
the text; or on the first item in the ASCII chart (the null character),
|
||
if the cursor is positioned beyond the end of the line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Backspace <Backspace>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
If Insert mode is ON:
|
||
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. The text to the right
|
||
of, and including the cursor position, shifts left one position. If the
|
||
cursor is in column one, the cursor line is appended to the end of the
|
||
preceding line.
|
||
|
||
If Insert mode is OFF:
|
||
Deletes the character to the left of the cursor. The text to the right
|
||
of the cursor does NOT close in or shift. If the cursor is in column
|
||
one, the cursor line is still appended to the end of the previous line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
BegFile <Ctrl PgUp>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at column one on the first line of the current
|
||
file. (If you are in the process of marking a Block using the
|
||
MarkColumn command, the cursor column position does not change when you
|
||
execute BegFile.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
BegLine <Home>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at column one of the current cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
BegScreen <Ctrl Home>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the top line of the current window. The cursor
|
||
column does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CenterLine <Ctrl O T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Centers the current cursor line based on column 1 and the right margin.
|
||
Use the SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> command to change the right margin.
|
||
|
||
With the cursor inside of a line Block, you can execute this command to
|
||
center several lines at once. With the cursor inside of a column Block,
|
||
you can center lines based on the left and right Block boundaries.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ChangeFilename <Alt O> or <Alt F><C> or <Esc><F><C>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes the name of the current file. The editor prompts for the new
|
||
name. If the file already exists, you are given the opportunity to
|
||
rename the file. The current file is marked as being a changed file.
|
||
(An asterisk appears on the StatusLine preceding the filename.) Note
|
||
that the file is not written (or overwritten) to disk until the renamed
|
||
file is saved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CloseWindow <Ctrl O C> or <Esc><W><C>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Closes the current window, unless it is the only window which is open,
|
||
in which case the command has no effect.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Copy <Grey +>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the marked Block into the Scrap Buffer. The Block is then
|
||
unmarked. If no Block is marked, the cursor line is copied into the
|
||
Scrap Buffer. The copying of the cursor line, when a Block is not
|
||
marked, is configurable. Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CopyBlock <Alt C> or <Esc><B><C>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the marked Block to the cursor position. If the Block is a
|
||
character Block (created using the DropAnchor, MarkCharacter, or
|
||
MarkBlockBegin/End commands) or a column Block (created using the
|
||
MarkColumn command), the Block is inserted into the text beginning at
|
||
the current cursor position. If the Block is a line Block (created using
|
||
the MarkLine command), it is inserted before or after the current cursor
|
||
line, depending on the configuration setting, "Insert line blocks ABOVE
|
||
the cursor line" (refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter 2).
|
||
The Block remains marked. Blocks may be copied from one file to
|
||
another.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CopyOverBlock <Alt Z>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the currently marked column Block to the current cursor position
|
||
by overlaying existing text and without shifting text to the right.
|
||
This command only works with column Blocks. The Block remains marked.
|
||
Blocks may be "copied over" from one file to another.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CurrentFilename
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Returns the name of the currently edited file, as if it had been typed
|
||
at the keyboard. This command is useful for manipulation of files from
|
||
within macros.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CursorDown <Cursor Down>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor downward in the file to the next line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CursorLeft <Cursor Left>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor one character to the left. When the cursor reaches the
|
||
left edge of the screen, it stops, unless the text has been scrolled
|
||
left, in which case the text scrolls right one position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CursorRight <Cursor Right>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor one character to the right. When the cursor reaches
|
||
the right edge of the screen, the text starts scrolling left until the
|
||
cursor reaches the maximum line length.
|
||
|
||
|
||
CursorUp <Cursor Up>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor upward in the file to the previous line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Cut <Grey ->
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the marked Block into the Scrap Buffer. The Block is then
|
||
deleted from the file being edited. If no Block is marked, the cursor
|
||
line is cut into the Scrap Buffer. The cutting of the cursor line, when
|
||
a Block is not marked, is configurable. Refer to the "Advanced Options"
|
||
section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DefaultWordSet
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Re-installs the default word set. Refer to the AltWordSet command for
|
||
more information about word sets.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelCh <Del>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the character at the current cursor position. The text on the
|
||
line to the right of the cursor shifts left one position. If the cursor
|
||
position is past the last character on the line, the next line is
|
||
appended to the cursor line. The "joining" of the next line when the
|
||
cursor is past the last character on the line is configurable. Refer to
|
||
the "General Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DeleteBlock <Alt G> or <Esc><B><D>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the currently marked Block. If there is not a Block marked in
|
||
the current file, this command has no effect.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelLine <Alt D> or <Ctrl Y> or <Esc><E><D>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the cursor line. The line following the cursor line becomes the
|
||
new cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelLtWord <Ctrl Backspace>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the "word" to the left of the cursor. If the cursor is in
|
||
column one, the cursor line is appended to the end of the preceding
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelRtWord <Ctrl T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the "word" to the right of the cursor. If the cursor position
|
||
is past the last character on the line, the next line is appended to the
|
||
cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelScrBuff <Ctrl B D>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes the requested Scratch Buffer. The editor prompts for the name of
|
||
the Scratch Buffer to be deleted. Press <Enter> on a blank entry to
|
||
bring up a list of all named Scratch Buffers. The appropriate buffer
|
||
can be selected from this list by moving the cursor to an entry and
|
||
pressing <Enter>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DelToEol <F6> or <Esc><E><E>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Deletes text on the cursor line, from the cursor position to the end of
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DirTree <Esc><F><I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Displays a pick list of all the drives on your system, along with a
|
||
directory tree for the current drive. The current drive or directory
|
||
can be changed from this pick list.
|
||
|
||
To switch to a different directory, move the cursor bar to the desired
|
||
entry, and press <Enter>. To change to a different drive, move the
|
||
cursor bar to the desired drive, and press <Enter>. The selected drive
|
||
becomes the current drive, and the directory tree for that drive is
|
||
displayed in the pick list.
|
||
|
||
Following is an example of a directory tree pick list:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Dir Tree ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ A: ³
|
||
³ B: ³
|
||
³ C: ³
|
||
³ D: ³
|
||
³ ÃÄÄÄTSEJR ³
|
||
³ ³ ÃÄÄÄMAC ³
|
||
³±±±³±±±ÃÄÄÄDOC±±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄSPELL ³
|
||
³ ³ ÃÄÄÄTEMP ³
|
||
³ ³ ÀÄÄÄWORD ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄTSEPRO ³
|
||
³ ÃÄÄÄDOC ³
|
||
³ ÀÄÄÄMAC ³
|
||
³ E: ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
Dos <Alt F9>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The editor prompts for a command, which is passed to DOS for execution.
|
||
After the command is executed by DOS, control is returned to the editor.
|
||
If you want to execute a series of commands in DOS, you should use the
|
||
Shell command, described later in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ You should NOT execute any TSR (terminate and stay ³
|
||
³ resident) programs from the editor's Dos command. This ³
|
||
³ includes the DOS print and graph commands, and ³
|
||
³ memory-resident programs such as Sidekick and Superkey. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
DropAnchor <Alt A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is used to mark a character Block. Initially executing
|
||
this command marks one end of a Block at the cursor position. As the
|
||
cursor is moved, the Block "grows" with it. Executing this command
|
||
again marks the other end of the Block at the cursor position. If
|
||
DropAnchor is executed in a file that already contains a character
|
||
Block, the Block is extended to the current cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
DupLine <F4>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes a copy of the current cursor line and inserts the copy immediately
|
||
following the cursor line. The cursor is moved to the new line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
EditFile <Alt E> or <Alt F><L> or <Esc><F><L>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The editor prompts for the name(s) of the additional file(s) to be
|
||
edited. Wildcard characters (* or ?) are permissible, as are multiple
|
||
filenames. The editor does not load multiple copies of the same file.
|
||
If you issue the EditFile command using the name of a file that has
|
||
already been loaded, the editor makes that file the current file.
|
||
|
||
The option "Load wildcarded filespecs from inside the editor" has an
|
||
effect on the behavior of this command when wildcard characters are
|
||
included. (Refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
EndFile <Ctrl PgDn>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor on the last line of the file immediately following
|
||
the last non-blank character. If the last line of the file is blank,
|
||
the cursor is positioned in column one. (If you are in the process of
|
||
marking a Block using the MarkColumn command, the cursor column position
|
||
does not change when you execute EndFile.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
EndLine <End>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor immediately following the last non-blank character
|
||
on the cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
EndPara
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor immediately following the last nonblank character
|
||
of the current paragraph.
|
||
|
||
|
||
EndScreen <Ctrl End>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The cursor is positioned on the last line of the current window. The
|
||
cursor column does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Escape <Esc>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
If executed while editing, the pull-down menus are displayed.
|
||
Otherwise, this command terminates any editor prompt.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ExecuteScrap <Ctrl Enter> or <Esc><M><E>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Plays back the latest macro that was created using the MacroRecord
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Exit <Ctrl K D>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Conditionally discards the current file. If the file has not been
|
||
modified, the file is discarded without prompting. If the file has been
|
||
modified, the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
Ú Save Changes? Ä¿
|
||
³±Yes±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ No ³
|
||
³ Cancel ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Press <Y> to save and then discard the file. Press <N> to discard the
|
||
file without saving any changes. Press <C> or <Esc> to halt the command
|
||
and return control back to the editor, without saving or quitting the
|
||
file.
|
||
|
||
The editor can be configured, when only a single file is being edited
|
||
and the Exit command is issued, to either terminate or prompt for
|
||
another file to edit. Refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter
|
||
2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
File <Ctrl K X> or <Alt F><F> or <Esc><F><F>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Saves and then discards the current file.
|
||
|
||
The editor can be configured, when only a single file is being edited
|
||
and the File command is issued, to either terminate or prompt for
|
||
another file to edit. Refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter
|
||
2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
FillBlock <Ctrl K L> or <Esc><B><F>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Fills an entire marked Block with any ASCII character. You are prompted
|
||
to enter the desired character. FillBlock is recommended for use with
|
||
column and word Blocks only. When used with line or character Blocks,
|
||
the indicated character fills the Block out to the maximum length of the
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Find <Ctrl Q F> or <Esc><S><F>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Searches for a specified string of characters within the current file.
|
||
The User is prompted for a search string and search options. Available
|
||
search options are:
|
||
|
||
[B] Search backwards from the current cursor position.
|
||
[G] Global search. Begin searching from the beginning of the file
|
||
(or Block, if the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
[L] Local search. Limit the search to the marked Block.
|
||
[I] Ignore the case of the search string.
|
||
[W] Search for whole words only.
|
||
[^] Anchor the search string to the beginning of the line (or
|
||
Block, if the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
[$] Anchor the search string to the end of the line (or Block, if
|
||
the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
|
||
|
||
FindReplace <Ctrl Q A> or <Esc><S><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Searches and replaces strings within the current file. The User is
|
||
prompted for a search string, a replace string, and options. Available
|
||
search options are:
|
||
|
||
[B] Search backwards from the current cursor position.
|
||
[G] Global search and replace. Begin searching from the beginning
|
||
of the file (or Block, if the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
[L] Local search and replace. Limit the search to the marked
|
||
Block.
|
||
[I] Ignore the case of the search string.
|
||
[W] Search for whole words only.
|
||
[^] Anchor the search string to the beginning of the line (or
|
||
Block, if the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
[$] Anchor the search string to the end of the line (or Block, if
|
||
the [L] option is also selected).
|
||
[N] Find and replace with NO prompting.
|
||
[#] Replace the indicated number of times (where "#" is an actual
|
||
number).
|
||
|
||
At every occurrence of the search string in the file, the User is given
|
||
the following replace options (unless the [N] or [#] serach option is
|
||
specified):
|
||
|
||
[Y] Replace the search string with the replace string and continue
|
||
on to the next occurrence of the search string.
|
||
[N] Do not make any changes but continue on to the next occurrence
|
||
of the search string.
|
||
[O] Replace the search string with the replace string and then
|
||
terminate the FindReplace process.
|
||
[R] Replace the search string with the replace string for this and
|
||
the rest of the occurrences throughout the file without any
|
||
further prompting.
|
||
[Q] Terminate the FindReplace process.
|
||
|
||
You can press <Ctrl Break> to halt a global FindReplace.
|
||
|
||
|
||
FirstNonWhite
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Intended as a replacement and/or supplement to the BegLine command.
|
||
Places the cursor at the first non-white character on the line, or
|
||
column 1 if the line does not have any non-white characters. "White"
|
||
characters are tabs or spaces. A useful macro would be:
|
||
|
||
Home BegLine MacroQuitTrue FirstNonWhite
|
||
|
||
(Explanation: If already at the beginning of a line, go to the first
|
||
non-white character on the line; otherwise, go to the beginning of the
|
||
line.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
Flip <Alt 3>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Reverses the case (upper to lower and lower to upper) of all characters
|
||
in a marked Block. The cursor must be within the marked Block. If the
|
||
cursor is outside of the marked Block or if no Block is marked, the case
|
||
of the character at the current cursor position is reversed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GetPrev <Ctrl - (dash)>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Duplicates the character immediately above the cursor at the cursor
|
||
position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GetScrBuff <Ctrl B L>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the contents of the named Scratch Buffer at the cursor position.
|
||
Refer to the "Block Commands" section of Chapter 1 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GExit <Alt X> or <Alt Q><X> or <Esc><Q><X>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Issues the Exit command for all files that have been loaded. If no
|
||
files have been modified, this command immediately terminates the editor
|
||
and returns control to DOS. If any files have been modified, you are
|
||
prompted with the following menu for each modified file:
|
||
|
||
Ú Save Changes? Ä¿
|
||
³±Yes±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ No ³
|
||
³ Cancel ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Press <Y> to save and then discard the file. Press <N> to discard the
|
||
file without saving any changes. Press <C> or <Esc> to halt the command
|
||
and return control back to the editor, without saving or quitting the
|
||
file.
|
||
|
||
For example, if you have ten files loaded and two of them have been
|
||
modified, then you are prompted to save changes twice, once for each
|
||
modified file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GFile <Alt F><G> or <Esc><F><G>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Instructs the editor to discard all files that have been loaded. Any
|
||
files that have been modified are unconditionally saved.
|
||
|
||
If no files have been changed, this command immediately terminates the
|
||
editor and returns control to DOS.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoBlockBeg <Ctrl Q B>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the beginning of the currently marked Block. If
|
||
the Block is in a file other than the current file, the file containing
|
||
the Block becomes the new current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoBlockEnd <Ctrl Q K>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the end of the currently marked Block. If the
|
||
Block is in a file other than the current file, the file containing the
|
||
Block becomes the new current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoColumn <Esc><S><G>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the requested column. The editor prompts for
|
||
the desired column number.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoFirstLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor on the beginning line of the current file. The
|
||
column position is not changed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoLastLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor on the last line of the current file. The column
|
||
position is not changed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GotoLine <Ctrl J>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the requested line. The editor prompts for the
|
||
desired line number.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GPQuit <F3> or <Alt Q><Q> or <Esc><Q><Q>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Issues the PQuit command for all files that have been loaded.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GrowWindow <Ctrl O G> or <Esc><W><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes the size of the current window, if there are multiple windows on
|
||
the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
GSave <Alt Y>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Issues the SaveFile command for all files that have been modified.
|
||
|
||
|
||
HalfPgDn
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text toward the end of the file one-half page.
|
||
|
||
|
||
HalfPgUp
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text toward the beginning of the file one-half page.
|
||
|
||
|
||
HorizontalWindow <Ctrl O H> or <Esc><W><S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Splits the screen or current window horizontally, creating a new window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
IncrementalSearch <Ctrl I> or <Esc><S><I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Searches incrementally for a string. As you type characters of a search
|
||
string, a case-insensitive, forward search immediately begins, based on
|
||
the characters currently in the search string.
|
||
|
||
Within the IncrementalSearch prompt, the following keys are operational:
|
||
|
||
<Enter> or <Esc> Terminates IncrementalSearch operation.
|
||
|
||
<Backspace> Removes the last character from the current
|
||
IncrementalSearch string. The editor re-locates
|
||
the previous string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl N> Searches forward for the next occurrence of the
|
||
current IncrementalSearch string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl P> Searches backward for the previous occurrence of
|
||
the current IncrementalSearch string.
|
||
|
||
<Ctrl B> Searches forward from the beginning of the file for
|
||
the first occurrence of the current
|
||
IncrementalSearch string.
|
||
|
||
|
||
InsertDate
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the system date at the current cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
InsertLine <Alt F2> or <Esc><E><I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts a blank line above the cursor line and positions the cursor on
|
||
the newly created line. The cursor column does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
InsertTime
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the system time at the current cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isBegLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is at column 1; otherwise, FALSE is returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isCurrChar
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Used to set a conditional branch based on the value of the character at
|
||
the cursor position. The format is:
|
||
|
||
isCurrChar char
|
||
|
||
Where "char" is the character in literal format (surrounded by quotes,
|
||
either single or double) or in ASCII value format, preceded by a pound
|
||
sign (#).
|
||
|
||
Examples:
|
||
|
||
isCurrChar 'a'
|
||
JTrue found:
|
||
|
||
isCurrChar #97
|
||
JTrue found:
|
||
|
||
Both of these examples jump to the label "found" if the current
|
||
character is "a".
|
||
|
||
|
||
isCursorInBlock
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is inside a marked Block; otherwise, FALSE is
|
||
returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isEmptyLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the current line is empty or contains only white space;
|
||
otherwise, FALSE is returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isEndLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is past the last non-white character on the
|
||
current line; otherwise, FALSE is returned, including the case when the
|
||
cursor is on an empty line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isFirstLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is on the first line of the currently edited
|
||
file; otherwise, FALSE is returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isLastLine
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is on the last line of the currently edited
|
||
file; otherwise, FALSE is returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
isWord
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Returns TRUE if the cursor is on a character included in the current
|
||
word set; otherwise, FALSE is returned.
|
||
|
||
|
||
JFalse
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to transfer control to the named label, if the previous
|
||
command returned FALSE.
|
||
|
||
|
||
JoinLine <Alt J> or <Esc><E><J>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Joins the line below the cursor line to the end of the cursor line. If
|
||
the cursor is past the end of the line, then the line is joined at the
|
||
cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
JTrue
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to transfer control to the named label, if the previous
|
||
command returned TRUE.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Jump
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to unconditionally transfer control to the named label.
|
||
|
||
|
||
KillFile <Ctrl K Z>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Erases the currently edited file from disk. The file remains loaded in
|
||
the editor and is marked as being a changed file. (An asterisk appears
|
||
on the StatusLine preceding the filename.) This command is very useful
|
||
when available disk space is low.
|
||
|
||
|
||
LineDown <Ctrl Cursor Down>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text one line at a time toward the end of the file. The
|
||
cursor remains stationary on the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
LineUp <Ctrl Cursor Up>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text one line at a time toward the beginning of the file.
|
||
The cursor remains stationary on the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ListFiles <Esc><F><T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Displays a list of the currently loaded files. To switch to another
|
||
file, move the cursor to the appropriate file and press <Enter>. To keep
|
||
editing the current file, press <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Literal <Ctrl P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Causes the editor to literally interpret the keystroke that is entered
|
||
immediately following this command. It is used to insert control
|
||
characters into the currently edited file. For example, to insert the
|
||
ASCII formfeed character (ASCII 12), you would first press <Ctrl P>
|
||
then <Ctrl L>. To insert a "null" character into the file, press
|
||
<Ctrl P> and then <Ctrl 2>. (Note: The "2" must be the "2" key on the
|
||
alphanumeric keyboard, NOT the key on the numeric keypad.) Refer to the
|
||
"Adding Text" section of Chapter 1 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
LocateFile <Esc><F><A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Searches an entire drive for a specified filename. A list of all
|
||
matching filenames is displayed, allowing the user to select the
|
||
appropriate file to edit.
|
||
|
||
This command prompts for the filename for which to search. A complete
|
||
name or an ambiguous name (with DOS wildcard characters) can be
|
||
specified. By default, the current drive is searched. However, a
|
||
different drive can be searched by prefacing the filename with the drive
|
||
name (such as, d:foo). The default or specified drive is searched, and
|
||
all matching filenames are displayed in a pick list. To select the
|
||
desired file to edit, position the cursor bar on that filename in the
|
||
pick list, and press <Enter>. To remove the pick list, press <Esc>.
|
||
|
||
This command is also available in a "File(s) to edit:" prompt.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Lower <Alt 2>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes all characters in a marked Block to lower case. The cursor must
|
||
be within the marked Block. If the cursor is outside of the marked
|
||
Block or if no Block is marked, the character at the current cursor
|
||
position is changed to lower case.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroQuit
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to immediately terminate a macro, thus saving a "jump past
|
||
the end of the macro".
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroQuitFalse
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to immediately terminate a macro, if the previous command
|
||
returned FALSE, thus saving a "jump past the end of the macro on FALSE".
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroQuitTrue
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
It is used to immediately terminate a macro, if the previous command
|
||
returned TRUE, thus saving a "jump past the end of the macro on TRUE".
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroRead <Esc><M><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Loads the named macro file, with all macros contained therein, from disk
|
||
into the editor's internal macro buffer. The macros are assigned to the
|
||
keys exactly as they were originally recorded and saved. The editor
|
||
prompts the user for the name of the file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroRecord <Ctrl M> or <Esc><M><M>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) macro recording. If macro recording is OFF, this
|
||
turns macro recording ON and prompts for a key to which to assign the
|
||
macro. After pressing the desired key, all following keystrokes are
|
||
recorded until the MacroRecord key is pressed again. After the macro
|
||
has been recorded, it can be played back by pressing the key to which
|
||
the macro was assigned.
|
||
|
||
Instead of assigning a macro to a specific key, it can be assigned to a
|
||
"scrap" or temporary area by simple pressing <Enter> at the prompt. A
|
||
macro assigned to the scrap area may be played back by entering the
|
||
ExecuteScrap <Ctrl Enter> command. The scrap area is updated each time
|
||
the MacroRecord command is executed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MacroWrite <Esc><M><W>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Saves all currently defined macros to a binary disk file. The editor
|
||
prompts for the name of the file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MainMenu <Esc>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Activates the pull-down menu system. Many of the editor's commands can
|
||
be executed via the menus.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MakeBotofScreen
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text in the window so that the cursor line becomes the
|
||
bottom line of the window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MakeCtrofScreen <Shift F5>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text in the window so that the cursor line becomes the
|
||
center line of the window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MakeTopofScreen <F5>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text in the window so that the cursor line becomes the top
|
||
line of the window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkBlockBegin <Ctrl K B> or <Esc><B><B>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Marks the beginning of a character Block. The Block is not shown until
|
||
the MarkBlockEnd command is executed at some position beyond the
|
||
beginning position of the Block. For an alternate method of marking
|
||
character Blocks, refer to the DropAnchor and MarkCharacter commands.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkBlockEnd <Ctrl K K> or <Esc><B><E>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Marks the end of a character Block. The Block is not shown until the
|
||
MarkBlockBegin command is also executed at some position before the end
|
||
of the Block. For an alternate method of marking character Blocks,
|
||
refer to the DropAnchor and MarkCharacter commands.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkCharacter
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is used to mark a character Block. It is similar to the
|
||
DropAnchor command except the cursor position is NOT included as part of
|
||
the Block.
|
||
|
||
This command is provided as a replacement for the DropAnchor command. If
|
||
you want the cursor position included in character Blocks, then continue
|
||
to use DropAnchor; otherwise, replace the DropAnchor command with this
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
Note that the editor uses the MarkCharacter command to provide a set of
|
||
CUA-style Block-marking keys (using the shifted cursor keys). Refer to
|
||
"CUA-Style Block Marking" in Chapter 1.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkColumn <Alt K>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is used to mark a column Block. Initially executing this
|
||
command marks the current cursor position. As the cursor is moved, the
|
||
Block "grows". Executing this command again marks the other end of the
|
||
Block at the current cursor position. If MarkColumn is executed in a
|
||
file that already contains a Block, the Block is extended to the current
|
||
cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkLine <Alt L> or <Esc><B><L>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is used to mark a line Block. Initially executing this
|
||
command marks the current cursor line. As the cursor is moved, the
|
||
Block "grows" with it, line by line. Executing this command again marks
|
||
the other end of the Block at the current cursor line. If MarkLine is
|
||
executed in a file that already contains a Block, the Block is extended
|
||
to the current cursor line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MarkWord <Ctrl K T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is used to mark a word Block. Executing this command marks
|
||
the word at the current cursor position. If there is no word at the
|
||
current cursor position, then no action is taken.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Match <Alt F3>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Finds the corresponding "(", ")", "{", "}", "[", "]", "<", ">"
|
||
character. This command is primarily intended for programming languages
|
||
in which complicated expressions are grouped with one or more of these
|
||
characters. This command is very useful for finding unmatched
|
||
parentheses.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MaximizeWindow <Ctrl O M> or <Esc><W><M>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes the current window as large as possible by making all other
|
||
windows as small as possible.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MouseMenu
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Pops up a menu of Block-related commands. This command provides access
|
||
to a list of Block-related commands for easy selection using a mouse.
|
||
When invoked, a menu similar to the following is displayed:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Mouse Menu ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³±Cut±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ Copy ³
|
||
³ Paste ³
|
||
³ Paste Over ³
|
||
³ UnMark ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ Copy to Windows Clipboard ³
|
||
³ Paste from Windows Clipboard ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ Copy Block ³
|
||
³ Copy Over Block ³
|
||
³ Move Block ³
|
||
³ Delete Block ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ Fill Block ³
|
||
³ Sort ³
|
||
ÃÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ´
|
||
³ Upper ³
|
||
³ Lower ³
|
||
³ Flip ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
If the mouse is not used, this menu can still be accessed by assigning
|
||
this command to a key.
|
||
|
||
|
||
MoveBlock <Alt M> or <Esc><B><M>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves (copies and deletes) the currently marked Block to the cursor
|
||
position. If the Block is a character Block (created using the
|
||
DropAnchor, MarkCharacter, or MarkBlockBegin/End commands) or a column
|
||
Block (created using the MarkColumn command), the Block is inserted into
|
||
the text beginning at the current cursor position. If the Block is a
|
||
line Block (created using the MarkLine command), it is inserted before
|
||
or after the current cursor line, depending on the configuration
|
||
setting, "Insert line blocks ABOVE the cursor line" (refer to the
|
||
"General Options" section of Chapter 2). The Block remains marked.
|
||
Blocks may be moved from one file to another.
|
||
|
||
|
||
NewFile
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Executes the Exit <Ctrl K D> command followed by the EditFile <Alt E>
|
||
command. Refer to the Exit and EditFile commands in this chapter for
|
||
more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
NextEqualIndent
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor to the next line whose text starts in the same column
|
||
as the current line. If the current line is blank, moves to the next
|
||
blank line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
NextFile <Alt N> or <Alt F><N> or <Esc><F><N>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes the next file in the ring the new current file when multiple files
|
||
are loaded.
|
||
|
||
|
||
NextPara
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor on the first character of the next paragraph.
|
||
|
||
|
||
NextWindow <Ctrl O N> or <Esc><W><N>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes the window below the current window the new current window. If
|
||
the current window is at the bottom of the screen, the top window on the
|
||
screen becomes the current window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
OneWindow <Ctrl O O> or <Esc><W><O>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Closes all windows except the current window and expands it to occupy
|
||
the entire screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PageDown <PgDn>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text toward the end of the file, one page-full less one
|
||
line, at a time.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PageUp <PgUp>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text toward the top of the file, one page-full less one
|
||
line, at a time.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Paste <Grey *>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the contents of the Scrap Buffer at the cursor position. The
|
||
Scrap Buffer is loaded using the Cut or Copy commands. If the Scrap
|
||
Buffer contains a character or column Block, it is inserted at the
|
||
cursor position. If the Scrap Buffer contains a line Block, it is
|
||
inserted before or after the cursor line depending on the configuration
|
||
setting, "Insert line blocks ABOVE the cursor line". (Refer to the
|
||
"General Options" section of Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
Paste is also available within prompt boxes.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PasteOver <Ctrl PrtSc>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This is a Paste command for column Blocks. It takes a column Block
|
||
which has been loaded into the Scrap Buffer using the Cut or Copy
|
||
commands, and places the contents at the current cursor position by
|
||
overlaying existing text, without shifting text to the right.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Pause
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Temporarily suspends execution of a macro until either <Enter> or
|
||
<Esc> is pressed. Refer to "Macro Pause" in the file MACRO.DOC.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PQuit <Ctrl K Q> or <Alt F><Q> or <Esc><F><Q>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command initiates a protected quit. If the current file has not
|
||
been modified, it is discarded. If the current file has been modified,
|
||
the following prompt is issued:
|
||
|
||
Ú Lose Changes? Ä¿
|
||
³±Yes±±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ No ³
|
||
³ Cancel ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Press <Y> to quit the current file. Press <N>, <C>, or <Esc> to cancel
|
||
the command, without discarding the current file.
|
||
|
||
If multiple files are being edited, this command makes the previous file
|
||
in the ring the new current file.
|
||
|
||
The editor can be configured, when only a single file is being edited
|
||
and the PQuit command is issued, to either terminate or prompt for
|
||
another file to edit. Refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter
|
||
2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrevEqualIndent
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Moves the cursor to the previous line whose text starts in the same
|
||
column as the current line. If the current line is blank, moves to the
|
||
previous blank line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrevFile <Ctrl K P> or <Alt F><P> or <Esc><F><P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes the previous file in the ring the new current file when multiple
|
||
files are loaded.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrevPara
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor on the first character of the previous paragraph.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrevPosition <Ctrl Q P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the previous cursor position. Very helpful when
|
||
used with the GotoLine command. The GotoLine command can be used to go
|
||
directly to a certain line of the file. The PrevPosition can then be
|
||
used to return you to the previous cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrevWindow <Ctrl O P> or <Esc><W><P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Makes the window above the current window the new current window. If
|
||
the current window is at the top of the screen, the bottom window on the
|
||
screen becomes the current window.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrintAll <Alt P><A> or <Esc><P><A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Prints the entire contents of the current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrintBlock <Alt P><B> or <Esc><P><B>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Prints the entire contents of the marked Block. The marked Block must
|
||
be in the current file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
PrintEject <Alt P><F> or <Esc><P><F>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sends a formfeed character (ASCII 12) to the printer.
|
||
|
||
|
||
QuickHelp <F1> or <Alt H>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Displays the Help Screen. A default Help Screen is provided with the
|
||
editor; however, you may wish to design your own Help Screen. For more
|
||
information, refer to "The Help Screen" section of Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Quit
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Unconditional quit. The current file is discarded regardless of any
|
||
changes made to it. This command is for those who do not like software
|
||
that "nags" you. USE WITH CAUTION!
|
||
|
||
|
||
ReadBlock <Alt R> or <Alt F><R> or <Esc><F><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the named disk file at the current cursor position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
RepeatCmd <Ctrl Q Q>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Repeats the last character, command, or macro entered from the keyboard
|
||
up to 9,999 times. You are prompted for the number of times to repeat.
|
||
|
||
Repeating automatically terminates when any command fails. For example,
|
||
if you are repeating a search and get a "Not Found", repeating then
|
||
stops. You can also press <Ctrl Break> at any time from the keyboard to
|
||
cancel repeating.
|
||
|
||
|
||
RepeatFind <Ctrl L> or <Esc><S><A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Repeats the previous search (Find, FindReplace, IncrementalSearch)
|
||
command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ResizeWindow <Ctrl O G> or <Ctrl O S> or <Esc><W><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes the size of the current window, if there are multiple windows on
|
||
the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
RestoreSettings
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Restores settings saved by the SaveSettings command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Return <Enter>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
The Return command behaves differently depending on Insert mode and
|
||
AutoIndent mode.
|
||
|
||
If Insert mode is OFF, the cursor is positioned at the first column of
|
||
the next line. If Insert mode is ON, the current cursor line is split
|
||
at the cursor position and any text to the right of and including the
|
||
cursor position is placed on a new line following the current line. If
|
||
the cursor is past the last character on the line, then a blank line is
|
||
added following the current line. The cursor is then moved to the first
|
||
column of the new line.
|
||
|
||
If AutoIndent is ON, spaces are inserted ahead of the cursor position to
|
||
align it with the text on the previous line.
|
||
|
||
If AutoIndent is OFF, the text is moved to the beginning of the next
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
The Return command can be configured to split or not split lines when
|
||
Insert mode is ON. Refer to the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2
|
||
for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SaveFile <Ctrl K S> or <Alt F><S> or <Esc><F><S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Saves to disk the file currently being edited. The file remains loaded,
|
||
ready for further editing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SaveSettings
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Saves the current settings of: Insert, AutoIndent, WordWrap, Sound, and
|
||
Screen Updating. See RestoreSettings.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ScreenLeft <Alt F5>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Shifts the screen to the left, the number of columns specified in the
|
||
configuration program. Refer to the "Colors/Screen Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ScreenRight <Alt F6>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Shifts the screen to the Right, the number of columns specified in the
|
||
configuration program. Refer to the "Colors/Screen Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ScrollDown <Ctrl Z>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text one line at a time toward the end of the file. The
|
||
cursor remains on the same line of text until it reaches the top of the
|
||
screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ScrollUp <Ctrl W>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Scrolls the text one line at a time toward the beginning of the file.
|
||
The cursor remains on the same line of text until it reaches the bottom
|
||
of the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetAutoIndentMode
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets AutoIndent mode ON. To set AutoIndent mode OFF, do the following:
|
||
|
||
SetAutoIndentMode ToggleIndent
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetBakups
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables the automatic creation of file backups, which causes the editor
|
||
to create a backup file using the ".bak" file extension whenever a
|
||
modified file is saved. (Refer to ToggleBakups for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetBoxDraw
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables Box Drawing mode. The letter "B" appears on the StatusLine when
|
||
this mode is ON. (Refer to ToggleBoxDraw for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetCenterFinds
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables Find centering, which causes the Find and FindReplace commands
|
||
to center the found text vertically in the window. (Refer to
|
||
ToggleCenterFinds for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetCtabwidth <Esc><O><C>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the cursor tab width. This is the width that is used when the
|
||
TabRt or TabLt commands are executed and Fixed Tabs mode is in effect.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetCUAMarking
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables CUA-Style Block Marking mode, which defines shifted cursor keys
|
||
to be used to mark Blocks. (Refer to ToggleCUAMarking for more
|
||
information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetEGA25
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Switches a monitor with an EGA or VGA card to 25-line mode. This
|
||
command has no effect if the video card is not an EGA or VGA type.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetEGA43
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Switches a monitor with an EGA card to 43-line mode, or a monitor with a
|
||
VGA card to 50-line mode. This command has no effect if the video card
|
||
is not an EGA or VGA type.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetEnterMatching
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets EnterMatching mode ON. (Refer to ToggleEnterMatching for more
|
||
information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetInsMode
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets Insert mode ON. To set Insert mode OFF (that is, set overwrite
|
||
mode ON), do the following:
|
||
|
||
SetInsMode ToggleInsert
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintAddFF
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables the automatic sending of a formfeed character to the printer
|
||
when each print operation is complete (after the last printed page).
|
||
(Refer to TogglePrintAddFF for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintBotMargin <Alt P><O> or <Esc><P><O>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the number of lines that are left blank at the bottom of each page
|
||
during printing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintDevice <Alt P><D> or <Esc><P><D>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Allows the setting of the default print device. Choices include PRN,
|
||
LPT1 through LPT3, or any valid filename. When executed, the following
|
||
menu is displayed:
|
||
|
||
Ú Print Device Ä¿
|
||
³±PRN±±±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ LPT1 ³
|
||
³ LPT2 ³
|
||
³ LPT3 ³
|
||
³ Disk File... ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintLeftMargin <Alt P><L> or <Esc><P><L>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the number of spaces that are printed as a left margin at the
|
||
beginning of each line. The default is zero.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintLineSpacing <Alt P><S> or <Esc><P><S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Allows the setting of the print line spacing, up to a value of 200.
|
||
When executed, the following prompt is displayed:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Printer line spacing [1=single, 2=double, etc.]: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintPageSize <Alt P><P> or <Esc><P><P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the number of lines to be printed per page before sending a
|
||
formfeed. A value of zero allows continuous printing (no formfeeds
|
||
sent).
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPrintTopMargin <Alt P><T> or <Esc><P><T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the number of lines that are left blank at the top of each page
|
||
during printing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetPtabwidth <Esc><O><P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the Physical Tab Width. This determines the width to which
|
||
physical tab characters found in files are expanded if Physical Tab
|
||
Expansion is set ON. It also determines the number of spaces to be used
|
||
for Tabs Out mode. Refer to the ToggleTabsExpand and ToggleTabsOut
|
||
commands in this chapter for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetRmargin <Ctrl O R> or <Esc><O><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sets the right margin for word-wrap and paragraph reformatting. WordWrap
|
||
mode is automatically switched ON whenever the right margin is set using
|
||
this command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetScreenOff
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Turns screen updating OFF. You must turn screen updating back ON before
|
||
your macro prompts for input, or if there is some output from the macro
|
||
that you want displayed on the screen.
|
||
|
||
Note: The editor AUTOMATICALLY turns screen updating back ON when the
|
||
macro is finished executing. Thus, it is not necessary to issue
|
||
the SetScreenOn command at the end of the macro.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetScreenOn
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Turns screen updating ON (see SetScreenOff).
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSortCaseInsensitive
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets the sorting operation to case-insensitive. (Refer to
|
||
ToggleSortCaseInsensitive for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSortDescending
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets the sorting operation to descending order. (Refer to
|
||
ToggleSortDescending for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSoundOff
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Disables the tone sounded by the editor on failed searches.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSoundOn
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables the tone sounded by the editor on failed searches.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSwap
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Enables swapping to expanded memory or disk when the Shell and Dos
|
||
commands are executed. (Refer to ToggleSwap for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetSyncScroll
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets Synchronized Scrolling mode ON. (Refer to ToggleSyncScroll for
|
||
more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetTabsExpand
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets Physical Tab Expansion mode ON. (Refer to ToggleTabsExpand for
|
||
more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetTabsOut
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets Tabs Out mode ON. (Refer to ToggleTabsOut for more information.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetTabType <Esc><O><Y>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Determines the behavior of the tab key based on the tab type selected.
|
||
Choices are Fixed, Smart, and Variable. (Refer to the "Modes" section
|
||
of Chapter 1.) When executed, the following menu is displayed:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄ Tab Type ÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³±Fixed±±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ Smart ³
|
||
³ Variable ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetVarTabStops <Esc><O><V>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Allows the setting of the tab stops used when Variable tab type is
|
||
selected.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetVGA28
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Switches a monitor with a VGA card to 28-line mode. This command has no
|
||
effect if the video card is not a VGA type.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SetWordWrapMode
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command is intended for use only within macros.
|
||
|
||
Sets WordWrap mode ON. To set WordWrap mode OFF, do the following:
|
||
|
||
SetWordWrapMode ToggleWordWrap
|
||
|
||
|
||
Shell <F9> or <Alt F><O> or <Esc><F><O>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Invokes a DOS shell. While in the shell, you can execute DOS and other
|
||
commands. When you are ready to leave the shell, type "exit" and press
|
||
<Enter>. This places you back in the editor, exactly where you left
|
||
off.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Tip: ³
|
||
³ You should NOT execute any TSR (terminate and stay ³
|
||
³ resident) programs from the editor's Shell command. This ³
|
||
³ includes the DOS print and graph commands, and ³
|
||
³ memory-resident programs such as Sidekick and Superkey. ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
ShiftLeft <Shift F7>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Shifts the contents of the currently marked Block (or the cursor line,
|
||
if the cursor is not in a marked Block) one position to the left. If,
|
||
when you issue this command, the leftmost character on a line being
|
||
shifted is in the first column of the Block, that character is deleted
|
||
to allow the remainder of the line to shift left one position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ShiftRight <Shift F8>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Shifts the contents of the currently marked Block (or the cursor line,
|
||
if the cursor does not reside in a marked Block) one position to the
|
||
right. If, when you issue this command, the rightmost character on a
|
||
line being shifted is in the last column of the Block, that character is
|
||
deleted to allow the remainder of the line to shift right one position.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ShowEntryScreen <Alt F10>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Displays the original DOS screen as it appeared upon initial execution
|
||
of the editor. Press any key to return to the edit screen.
|
||
|
||
To use this command, the option "Do you want the original screen
|
||
restored upon termination (Y/N)?" must be set to "Y" (the default
|
||
setting). This option is set via the QCONFIG program, under
|
||
"Colors/screen."
|
||
|
||
|
||
ShrinkWindow <Ctrl O S> or <Esc><W><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes the size of the current window, if there are multiple windows on
|
||
the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Sort <Shift F3>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Sorts a range of lines. The sort key is determined by a marked column
|
||
Block. The lines spanned by the column Block determines the range of
|
||
lines to be sorted. For more information about column Blocks, refer to
|
||
the MarkColumn command in this chapter.
|
||
|
||
Whether the lines are sorted in ascending or descending order is
|
||
determined by the ToggleSortDescending command. Ignoring or respecting
|
||
differences in case is determined by the ToggleSortCaseInSensitive
|
||
command. (The initial state of both of these toggles can be set via the
|
||
configuration program. Refer to the "General Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2.)
|
||
|
||
Note: The Sort command can only be used with a single, nonzoomed window
|
||
on the screen.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SpacesToTabs <Esc><O><M>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Compresses occurrences of multiple spaces to tabs, where appropriate.
|
||
Spaces within quotes (single and double) are not compressed. If the
|
||
cursor is within a marked Block when this command is executed, only
|
||
spaces within the Block are compressed; otherwise, this common operates
|
||
on the entire file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SplitLine <Alt S> or <Esc><E><S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Splits the current cursor line at the cursor position. Any text to the
|
||
right of and including the cursor position is placed on a new line
|
||
following the current line. If the cursor is past the last character on
|
||
the line, then a blank line is added following the current line. The
|
||
cursor position does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
StoreScrBuff <Ctrl B S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the currently marked Block to the named Scratch Buffer. The
|
||
editor prompts for the name of the Scratch Buffer. The contents of
|
||
all Scratch Buffers are lost when the editor is terminated.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SwapChars
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Swaps the character at the cursor position with the character preceding
|
||
the cursor. The cursor column position does not change. If, when this
|
||
command is executed, the cursor is in column 1, or is positioned beyond
|
||
the last non-blank character of the line, then no action occurs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SwapLines <Ctrl F2> or <Esc><E><P>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Swaps the current line with the line immediately following it. The
|
||
cursor does not change its position relative to the screen. If the
|
||
cursor is on the last line of the file when this command is executed,
|
||
then no action occurs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
SwapWords
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Swaps the word in which the cursor is positioned with the previous word
|
||
on the current line. Any "non-word" characters between the affected
|
||
words are preserved. If, when this command is executed, the cursor is
|
||
not positioned on a character within a word, or if there is no previous
|
||
word on the current line, then no action occurs.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TabLt <Shift Tab>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the previous tab position, as defined by the tab
|
||
width. If Insert mode is ON, the text to the right, including the
|
||
character at the cursor position, shifts left.
|
||
|
||
The editor can be configured so that if Insert mode is ON, AND the
|
||
cursor is inside a marked Block, the entire Block shifts left by the
|
||
current cursor tab width. For more information on this option, refer to
|
||
the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
TabRt <Tab>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the next tab position, as defined by the cursor
|
||
tab width. If Insert mode is ON, the text to the right, including the
|
||
character at the cursor position, shifts right.
|
||
|
||
The editor can be configured so that if Insert mode is ON, AND the
|
||
cursor is inside a marked Block, the entire Block shifts right by the
|
||
current cursor tab width. For more information on this option, refer to
|
||
the "Advanced Options" section of Chapter 2.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TabsToSpaces <Esc><O><X>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Expands tab characters to the appropriate number of spaces. Tabs within
|
||
quotes (single and double) are not expanded. If the cursor is within a
|
||
marked Block when this command is executed, only tabs within the Block
|
||
are expanded; otherwise, this command operates on the entire file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleBakups <Esc><O><B>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) file backups. If ON, the editor creates a backup
|
||
file using the ".bak" file extension whenever a modified file is saved.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleBoxDraw <Shift F1>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Box Drawing mode. If ON, the cursor movement keys
|
||
(up, down, right, left) "draw" lines in the text, both up/down and
|
||
right/left. Very useful for creating charts and tables.
|
||
|
||
The letter "B" appears on the StatusLine when this mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleBoxType <Alt F1>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
This command prompts the User to select from different line drawing
|
||
styles for use with Box Drawing mode. The options are: Single, Double
|
||
Top, Double Side, Double, and Eraser. When executed, the following menu
|
||
is displayed:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄ Box Style ÄÄ¿
|
||
³±Single±±±±±±±±³
|
||
³ Double Top ³
|
||
³ Double Side ³
|
||
³ Double ³
|
||
³ Eraser ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleCenterFinds <Esc><S><C>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Find centering. If ON, this causes the Find,
|
||
FindReplace, and IncrementalSearch commands to center the found text
|
||
vertically on the screen. If OFF, the initial row the cursor was on when
|
||
the command was initiated does not change.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleCUAMarking
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) CUA-Style Block Marking mode. If ON, the shifted
|
||
cursor keys can be used to mark non-inclusive character Blocks. (Refer
|
||
to "CUA-Style Block Marking" in Chapter 1.)
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleEGA43 <Ctrl F1>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles an EGA monitor between 25-line and 43-line mode or a VGA monitor
|
||
between 25-line and 50-line mode. This command has no effect if the
|
||
video card is not an EGA or VGA type.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleEnterMatching <Esc><O><E>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) EnterMatching mode. If ON, the double quote,
|
||
parenthesis, square bracket, and curly brace keys all automatically
|
||
enter the matching right-hand character when the left-hand character is
|
||
entered. For example, typing the "[" key automatically enters a "]"
|
||
immediately following.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleIndent <Ctrl Q I> or <Esc><O><A>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) AutoIndent mode. If ON, the cursor is positioned
|
||
at the current left margin whenever the <Enter> key is pressed. The
|
||
current left margin is determined by the first non-blank character on
|
||
the immediately preceding line.
|
||
|
||
Paragraph reformatting and word-wrapping also use the current left
|
||
margin when AutoIndent mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
The letter "A" appears on the StatusLine when this mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleInsert <Ins> or <Esc><O><I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Insert mode. If ON, text to the right of the
|
||
cursor on the cursor line is shifted whenever characters, spaces, the
|
||
Backspace command, the TabLt command, or the TabRt command is entered.
|
||
Also, executing the Return command causes the current line to split at
|
||
the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
The letter "I" appears on the StatusLine when this mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TogglePrintAddFF <Esc><P><R>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) the automatic sending of a formfeed character to
|
||
the printer when printing is complete. If ON, the editor automatically
|
||
sends a final formfeed character when printing is complete (after the
|
||
last printed page).
|
||
|
||
|
||
TogglePrintLineNumbers <Alt P><N> or <Esc><P><N>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) the printing of line numbers.
|
||
|
||
|
||
TogglePrintPause <Alt P><U> or <Esc><P><U>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) pausing between pages while printing. If ON, the
|
||
editor pauses and requires a key press to continue after every page is
|
||
printed. This is useful with single sheet printers. When OFF, the
|
||
editor prints continuously without pausing.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleShowCurrChar <Esc><O><H>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) the display of the ASCII and Hexadecimal values of
|
||
the current character on the StatusLine. When ON, the ASCII and Hex
|
||
values of the current character are displayed in the far right portion
|
||
of the StatusLine. If the cursor is past the end of the text on the
|
||
line, <EOL> is displayed.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleSmartTabs <Ctrl Q T>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Smart Tabs mode. If ON, the TabRt and TabLt
|
||
commands place the cursor beneath the beginning of the next (or
|
||
previous) word on the first nonblank line preceding the current cursor
|
||
line.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleSortCaseInsensitive <Esc><B><I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) case-insensitive sorting. When ON, upper and lower
|
||
case letters are sorted as if they are of the same case. When OFF,
|
||
upper and lower case letters are sorted strictly by their ASCII value,
|
||
which places all upper case letters before the lower case letters.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleSortDescending <Esc><B><N>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) descending sorting. When ON, sorting is performed
|
||
from highest value to lowest value (descending). When OFF, sorting is
|
||
performed from lowest value to highest value (ascending).
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleSwap <Esc><O><S>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) swapping to expanded memory or disk when the Shell
|
||
<F9> and Dos <Alt F9> commands are executed. (You can specify a default
|
||
for swapping, using the configuration program. Refer to the "Advanced
|
||
Options" section of Chapter 2 for more information.)
|
||
|
||
If ON, the editor swaps itself out of DOS memory and to expanded memory
|
||
or disk when a shell command is executed. This leaves a small 2K editor
|
||
kernel in DOS memory, freeing up the rest of DOS memory for running
|
||
other applications out of the shell such as compilers or spreadsheets.
|
||
|
||
While you are in a shell, the editor maintains a file with a ".SWP" file
|
||
extension in your root directory. It is very important that you do not
|
||
delete this file while in the shell.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleSyncScroll <Ctrl O Y> or <Esc><W><Y>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Synchronized Scrolling mode in each window on the
|
||
screen (when multiple windows are open). When this mode is ON, the
|
||
editor attempts to synchronize logical cursor movement and scrolling in
|
||
all windows, based on cursor movement and scrolling activity in the
|
||
current window.
|
||
|
||
The letter "S" appears on the StatusLine when this mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleTabsExpand <Alt V>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Physical Tab Expansion mode. If ON, physical tab
|
||
characters (ASCII 9) found in a file are expanded into spaces according
|
||
to the Physical Tab Width set in the configuration program. If OFF,
|
||
physical tabs are displayed on the screen and a physical tab character
|
||
is placed in the text each time the TabRt command is entered.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleTabsOut <Alt I>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Tabs Out mode. If ON, continuous spaces in a line
|
||
of text are replaced with physical tabs (ASCII 9) according to the
|
||
Physical Tab Width set in the configuration program. Only spaces in
|
||
edited lines are replaced with physical tabs. Spaces falling between
|
||
single or double quotes are not replaced.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleVarTabs
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) Variable Tabs mode. When ON, tab stops are set to
|
||
those specified by the SetVarTabStop command, or by the default set by
|
||
the configuration program. When OFF, tab stops are set to a fixed tab
|
||
width, as specified by the SetCTabWidth command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleVGA28
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles a VGA monitor between 25-line and 28-line mode. This command
|
||
has no effect if the video card is not a VGA type.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ToggleWordwrap <Ctrl O W> or <Esc><O><W>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles (ON and OFF) WordWrap mode. If ON, the cursor, along with the
|
||
word currently being typed, automatically advances to the next line
|
||
whenever a character is typed beyond the right margin. The right margin
|
||
can be permanently set using the configuration program (refer to the
|
||
"General Options" section of Chapter 2) or temporarily changed using the
|
||
SetRmargin command.
|
||
|
||
The letter "W" appears on the StatusLine when this mode is ON.
|
||
|
||
|
||
UndoCursorline <Ctrl Q L>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Reverses any changes made to the current cursor line (except changes
|
||
made with the FindReplace command). If the cursor has been moved from
|
||
the changed line or a file or window command is executed, the changes
|
||
cannot be undone.
|
||
|
||
|
||
UnKill <Ctrl U> or <Esc><E><U>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Recovers the last deleted entry from the current file's Kill Buffer.
|
||
Deleted Blocks and lines are inserted immediately before the current
|
||
cursor line, and deleted words are inserted immediately before the
|
||
current cursor position.
|
||
|
||
The number of lines saved in the Kill Buffer may be set with the
|
||
configuration program. Refer to the "General Options" section of
|
||
Chapter 2 for more information.
|
||
|
||
|
||
UnmarkBlock <Alt U> or <Esc><B><U>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Unmarks the currently marked Block.
|
||
|
||
|
||
Upper <Alt 1>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Changes all characters in a marked Block to upper case. The cursor must
|
||
be within the marked Block. If the cursor is outside of the marked
|
||
Block or if no Block is marked, the character at the current cursor
|
||
position is changed to upper case.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WinClipCopy
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Copies the marked Block into the Microsoft Windows Clipboard. The Block
|
||
is then unmarked.
|
||
|
||
This command is similar to the Copy command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WinClipPaste
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Inserts the contents of the Microsoft Windows Clipboard into the current
|
||
file at the cursor position.
|
||
|
||
This command is similar to the Paste command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WordLeft <Ctrl Cursor Left>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the first character of the previous word.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WordRight <Ctrl Cursor Right>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Positions the cursor at the first character of the following word.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WrapPara <Alt B>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Reformats text from the current cursor position until a blank line or
|
||
end of file is encountered. If AutoIndent is ON, the line below the
|
||
cursor line is used for the left margin. Otherwise, a left margin of
|
||
zero is used. The right margin is determined by the configuration
|
||
program (refer to the "General Options" section of Chapter 2), or
|
||
interactively set by the SetRmargin command.
|
||
|
||
|
||
WriteBlock <Alt W> or <Alt F><W> or <Esc><F><W>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Writes the currently marked Block to the named file. The editor prompts
|
||
for the name of the file.
|
||
|
||
A Save-As-Filename feature is possible with the WriteBlock command,
|
||
allowing you to save your current file under a different name. To use
|
||
this feature, execute the WriteBlock <Alt W> command with no marked
|
||
Blocks in the file. the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³File to write: ³
|
||
³ ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Enter the new filename. If the filename you specify already exists,
|
||
the editor prompts with:
|
||
|
||
ÚÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ Choose ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ¿
|
||
³ Overlay Existing File ³
|
||
³ Append to File ³
|
||
ÀÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÙ
|
||
|
||
Select the desired option, or press <Esc> to cancel.
|
||
|
||
If there is a marked Block in the file, the WriteBlock command operates
|
||
as usual, and writes the currently marked Block to the named file.
|
||
|
||
|
||
ZoomWindow <Ctrl O Z> or <Esc><W><Z>
|
||
ÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄÄ
|
||
Toggles Zoom mode ON and OFF. If there are multiple windows on the
|
||
screen, entering the ZoomWindow command causes the current window to
|
||
fill the entire screen. Press ZoomWindow again to restore the other
|
||
windows to the screen.
|